JP6930341B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that fluctuates and displays a picture on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a prize is won in the operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a hit state, and a pattern is drawn. The variable display is started. When the lottery is won, a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175

In recent years, various measures have been taken to improve the reliability of the operation of gaming machines. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine in order to improve the reliability.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

The present invention
A main control means that outputs payout command information based on the entry of a ball into the entry section provided in the game area, and
In a gaming machine provided with a payout control means for controlling the payout means so that the game ball is paid out based on the input of the payout command information.
The main control means
A setting value determining means for determining one setting value from among the setting values having multiple stages corresponding to the expected acquisition value of the game ball, and
It has a set value changing means operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means.
The payout command information output from the main control means includes specific information indicating a set value determined by the set value determining means.

According to the present invention, the reliability of the gaming machine can be suitably improved.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a front view which shows the structure of the inner frame. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board unit from the rear. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the inner frame. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the back pack unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a schematic diagram which shows the winning probability for each setting. It is a schematic diagram which shows the winning / failing table for a low probability mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the winning / failing table for a high probability mode. (A), (b) is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between a per-type and a support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by the MPU of the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a variation display time. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure which concerns on the notification / effect control device and the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display control processing by MPU of a notification / effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start process for variation. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the types of variable display modes, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of each variable display mode. It is a block diagram which shows the monitoring apparatus and the structure related thereto. It is a block diagram which shows the main control apparatus and the structure related thereto. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting change which is executed in MPU of a main control unit. It is a timing chart which shows the switching of whether or not the setting can be changed. (A) is a flowchart showing the initial command output process in the second embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the setting change process. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a code included in an initial command and a setting change command, (b) a flowchart showing a prize ball command setting process, and (c) a schematic diagram showing information included in the prize ball command. (A) A flowchart showing a command correspondence process executed by the MPU of the payout control device, and (b) a flowchart showing a set value comparison process executed by the monitoring device according to the third embodiment. (A) A flowchart showing an abnormality notification setting process executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) an abnormality notification process executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the winning probability to the general winning opening, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the winning probability and the setting. It is the schematic which shows the difference of the normal range for each setting. (A) is a schematic view showing a monitoring device according to a fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic view showing information stored in a temporary storage area of the monitoring device. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality notification processing executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between a setting and reference information. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an electrical configuration in a sixth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between a set value and a correction coefficient. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an abnormality notification process executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device according to the seventh embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of abnormality notification. It is a flowchart which shows the process for canceling an abnormality notification executed by the MPU of a notification / effect control device. It is the schematic which shows the monitoring apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality notification release processing executed by the MPU of the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for setting change. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. (A) A block diagram showing a configuration related to transmission / reception of information showing a set value in the ninth embodiment, and (b) showing an effect setting process for generating an out-of-reach executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device. It is a flowchart. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of a display effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the set value and a symbol combination when the out-of-order super reach C is executed. It is the schematic which shows the setting suggestion possibility determination table. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the number of reservations and the stop display time of the symbol combination in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the effect. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for occurrence of the out-of-reach executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the number of games and the number of judgment criteria. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the variation display time executed by the MPU of the main control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the fluctuation display time and a setting suggestion. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for occurrence of the out-of-reach. It is a schematic diagram which shows the final stop symbol combination determination table for a detachment reach. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the final stop symbol combination and the content of a setting suggestion.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first form of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an unfolded manner. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main portion 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 11 is formed by connecting long frame members on four sides and is formed so as to form a rectangular frame as a whole. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration in the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the game hall or the like.

The game machine main portion 12 is supported by an outer frame 11 in a state where it can be opened and closed. Specifically, the upper support metal fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and further below to the connecting portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11. A side support metal fitting 18 is provided. A support mechanism is composed of the upper support metal fittings 17 and the lower support metal fittings 18, and the support mechanism causes the game machine main portion 12 to rotate on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11. , The right side is the rotation tip side, and the pachinko machine 10 can be rotated forward (see FIGS. 3 and 4).

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the gaming machine main portion 12 is arranged behind the inner frame 13 as a base body, the front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and the inner frame 13. It is equipped with a back pack unit 15. The inner frame 13 of the main portion 12 of the gaming machine is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine so that the back pack unit 15 can rotate backward. There is.

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. There is. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame body 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front, and the window portion 21 is the same by the glass unit 22. It is closed from the back side of the front door frame 14.

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition portion that partitions the holding region of the glass panel 23 back and forth, and both glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear with the partition portion interposed therebetween. That is, by securing a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, the game area PE is doubly covered from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

It is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 by using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame body 20. Further, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to use a plurality of glass panels and to face each of the glass panels in the front-rear direction with a predetermined gap in between. Incidentally, it is also possible to use a transparent synthetic resin panel member instead of the glass panel.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, an annular illumination portion 26 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the peripheral edge of the window portion 21. The annular illumination unit 26 is lit or blinked according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. In addition, an error indicator lamp 27 that lights up when a problem such as an error occurs is provided at the center of the annular illumination section 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and further to the left and right of the error indicator lamp section 27, during the payout of prize balls. A illuminating prize ball lamp unit 28 is provided. Further, speaker units 29 for outputting sound effects, BGM, etc. according to the game state are provided at positions close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28 (see FIG. 3). In the speaker unit 29, the monotonization of the game is suppressed by switching the BGM or the like according to the game state.

Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 32 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower plate 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32 (see FIG. 2). The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launch mechanism described later while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 34 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 33 and a game in which the game balls launched by the game ball launch mechanism do not reach the game area PE (see FIG. 3). When the ball is returned to the player, it has a function as a saucer for storing the discharged game ball.

A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to project toward the front side. By operating the game ball launching handle 41, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism described later. The rate of fire of the game ball increases as the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launch handle 41 increases, and when this operation amount is adjusted by the player to reach a predetermined amount, the game ball is played. It will reach the region PE. In addition, by adjusting this amount of operation by the player, it is possible to separate the game ball into the right route and the left route, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is formed of synthetic resin and has a front door side upper plate passage leading to the upper plate 33 and a front door side lower plate passage leading to the lower plate 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed in the upper corner portion thereof, and the entrance portion of the upper plate passage on the front door side is formed by partitioning the receiving portion to the left and right by a partition wall. A section is formed between the portion and the entrance portion of the lower plate passage on the front door side. The upper plate passage on the front door side and the lower plate passage on the front door side lead to the game ball distribution section described later on the upstream side, and the game balls entering the upper plate passage on the front door side are guided to the upper plate 33 and lower on the front door side. The game ball that has entered the plate passage is guided to the lower plate 34.

On the rotation base end side on the back surface of the front door frame 14, protrusion shafts are provided at the upper end portion and the lower end portion thereof. These protrusion shafts form an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. In FIG. 5, as in FIG. 3, the configuration in the gaming area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the inner frame base body 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. Further, the inner frame base body 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain plate is arranged below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically, the lower end thereof), and when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 is placed on the curtain plate. It will be listed. A slight clearance may be provided between the curtain plate and the inner frame base body 50 for the purpose of preventing mutual interference.

Support metal fittings 71 and 72 are attached to the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 5) on the front surface of the inner frame base body 50. Although not shown, the support metal fittings 71 and 72 have shaft portions, and by inserting the bearing portion provided in the front door frame 14 into these shaft portions, the front door frame with respect to the inner frame 13 is inserted. 14 is rotatably supported.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is provided on the rotating tip side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame base body 50. The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end portion (vertical frame member described later) of the inner frame base body 50, and the hook members 76 for the front door are arranged scattered in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) thereof. have. In the inner frame base body 50, slits for projecting the hook receiving member 49 (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 to the front side of the inner frame 13 correspond to each front door hook member 76. It is formed in this way. The front door hook member 76 protruding through the slits is locked to the hook receiving member 49 provided on the front door frame 14 in a one-to-one correspondence with each front door hook member 76, thereby locking the front door. The frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Further, the locking device 75 has an inner frame hook member 77 extending to the rear side of the inner frame 13. The inner frame hook member 77 is hooked on the hook receiving member 19 fixed to the outer frame 11, so that the gaming machine main portion 12 is locked with respect to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75 is installed in the inner frame base body 50 (locking device 75). The cylinder lock 78 is provided separately from the locking unit (each hook member 76, 77, interlocking rod, etc.) that constitutes the main part of the locking device 75, and is arranged adjacent to the locking unit. When the key inserted in the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the right (clockwise), the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the left (counterclockwise). And the lock of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released.

A storage recess 51 for accommodating the game board unit 80 is formed in the central portion of the inner frame base body 50. The accommodating recess is recessed in the rear of the gaming machine according to the outer shape of the gaming board unit 80, and the gaming board unit 80 is fixed to the accommodating recess 51 by a manual lock mechanism in a state of being fitted from the front of the gaming machine. A substantially rectangular window hole 52 is formed at the bottom of the accommodating recess 51, and the rear surface configuration of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80b described later) projects rearward of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52. .. Almost the entire window hole 52 is covered from the front of the gaming machine by the gaming board unit 80 mounted on the inner frame base body 50.

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 is provided on the front side of the game area PE on which the game ball flows down and on the back side of the game area forming body 80a and the game area forming body 80a, and various game parts (for example, variable display unit, control) described later are provided. The device, the movable effect mechanism, the decorative member capable of emitting light, etc.) are integrated with the back block 80b, which is mounted on the base body 251. The game area forming body 80a is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the front surface portion of the back block 80b is visible through the game area forming body 80a.

As described above, the game area PE is covered with the glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23). In the glass unit 22, the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front surface of the game area forming body 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is the same game area PE. They are arranged so that they are not lined up in the front and back at the same place. As a result, ball clogging in the game area PE is suppressed.

Hereinafter, the game board unit 80 (particularly, various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game area forming body 80a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8. FIG. 6 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 as viewed from the rear.

The game area forming body 80a is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its own thickness direction (front-back direction). As shown in FIG. 6, each opening is provided with a general winning opening 81, a variable winning device 82, operating openings 83a, 83b, a through gate 84, and the like. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating ports 83a, 83b, the game ball is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each winning portion, and the detection result thereof. A predetermined number of prize balls (payment of game balls) and other benefits are given to the player based on the above. In addition, an out port 89 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game area forming body 80a, and a game ball that has not entered various entry portions or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 89. In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out opening 89, the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating ports 83a and 83b is also referred to as "winning". Express.

Further, in the game area forming body 80a, a large number of nail members 93 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a wind turbine 94 are arranged. Has been done. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations of the nail member 93, the windmill 94, and the like, and is adjusted so that the above-mentioned general winning opening 81 and the like are won with an appropriate probability.

A central opening 85 is formed in the center of the game area forming body 80a, and a transparent opening cover 86 is attached so as to cover the central opening 85 from the back side of the game area forming body 80a. A variable display unit 252 or the like belonging to the back block 80b is located behind the central opening 85, and the variable display unit 252 or the like can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 85 (opening cover 86). There is. In FIG. 6, for convenience of explanation, the opening cover 86 is displayed by a two-dot chain line to show a state in which the variable display unit 252 can be visually recognized.

Actuating ports 83a and 83b, a through gate 84, and the like are arranged around the central opening 85. The actuating ports 83a and 83b are composed of an upper actuating port 83a arranged below the variable display unit 252 and a lower actuating port 83b arranged directly under the upper actuating port 83a, and particularly the lower actuating port 83a. The (lottery opportunity ball entry section) 83b is provided with an electric accessory 91 as an opening / closing type ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means). The electric accessory 91 includes a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece, and the position of the movable piece is changed by the drive unit so that the ball enters the lower operating port 83b. It is possible to switch between an open state (auxiliary state) where it is possible or easy, and a closed state (non-auxiliary state) where it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball.

In the game area PE, the through gate 84 is arranged at a position on the upstream side (more specifically, the side of the variable display unit 252) of the lower operating port 83b, and the passage of the through gate 84 of the game ball is used as a trigger. If the lottery is won, the electric accessory 91 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

When a ball enters the upper operating port 83a, three game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the lower operating port 83b, four game balls are paid out. However, the number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, for example, in order to enhance the advantage of the lower operating port 83b over the upper operating port 83a, it is preferable to set a larger number of payouts related to the lower operating port 83b than the number of payouts related to the upper operating port 83a.

The variable winning device (special winning device or special winning means) 82 is formed with a large winning opening leading to the back side of the game area forming body 80a, and an opening / closing member (opening / closing) for opening / closing the large winning opening. An opening / closing door is provided as a means). The opening / closing door can be switched between an open state (auxiliary state) in which the game ball can be entered or easily, and a closed state (non-assisted state) in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. Further, the opening / closing door is connected to a variable winning drive unit (specifically, a solenoid) provided on the back side of the game area forming body 80a, and the opening / closing door is normally kept closed and an internal lottery is performed. When the transition to the open / close execution mode (open / close execution state) is won in the above (big hit: when the transition result to the special gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state), the open state can be switched. It has become.

Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts when a big hit is won. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 82 in the opening / closing execution mode, for example, a plurality of rounds (for example, 4, 8, 16 rounds), with the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round. It is set so that the opening and closing doors are repeatedly opened up to the upper limit.

Here, the variable display unit 252 will be supplementarily described. The variable display unit 252 has a symbol display device 253 that variably displays (variates) the symbol by using the winning of the operating ports 83a and 83b as a trigger. The symbol display device 253 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, for example, the symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are scrolled in the left-right direction to be displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the jackpot is won, the symbols of the predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the preset effective line, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot). The symbol display device 253 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or a 7-segment type display device.

The game area forming body 80a is provided with a center frame 95 so as to surround the central opening 85. The center frame 95 is fixed to the game area forming body 80a (specifically, a plate body) from the front side thereof, and in such a fixed state, the center frame 95 stands up from the front surface of the game area forming body 80a. The gap between the center frame 95 and the glass unit 22 is configured to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, it is prevented that the game ball flowing down the game area PE collides with the symbol display device 253, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is on the right side of the variable display unit 252 (specifically, the center frame 95). It is roughly divided into a route that detours from the left side and a route that detours from the left side.

A stage portion on which the game ball can roll left and right is formed on the upper surface of the frame portion forming the lower portion of the center frame 95. The game balls flowing in from the inflow ports formed in the left and right left frame portions of the center frame 95 are discharged onto the stage portion through the warp passage also formed in the center frame 95. The stage portion is configured so that the game ball that has reached the stage portion can relatively easily flow into the upper operating port 83a, and the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on the stage portion is improved. Contributes to.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the central opening 85 is covered with the transparent opening cover 86 so that the game ball that has reached the stage portion does not move to the back block 80b (variable display unit 252) side. Is regulated by.

Further, a first holding lamp portion 98a and a second holding lamp portion 98b are provided on the front surface of the frame portion forming the lower portion of the center frame 95. The first holding lamp portion 98a on the left side corresponds to the upper operating port 83a, and the number of times the game ball has passed through the upper operating port 83a is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is increased by lighting the first holding lamp portion 98a. It is supposed to be displayed. The second holding lamp portion 98b on the right side corresponds to the lower operating port 83b, and the number of times the game ball has passed through the lower operating port 83b is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is increased by lighting the second holding lamp portion 98b. Is displayed.

The operating ports 83a and 83b are arranged at positions closer to the central opening 85 (variable display unit 252). Since the winning of the operating ports 83a and 83b can be used as a trigger to shift to the special gaming state, the player pays attention to whether or not the operating ports 83a and 83b are won and grasps whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. Therefore, it is considered that attention should be paid to the symbol display device 253. The fact that the operating ports 83a and 83b are provided near the variable display unit 252 is a device for concentrating the points that the player wants to pay attention to around the variable display unit 252.

At the right end of the game area forming body 80a (the rotating tip of the game board unit 80 described later), a game area partition member 99 for partitioning the game area PE is arranged together with the guide rail 100 described later. The game area partition member 99 is provided with a stopper member on which the game ball flying along the main display unit 87 and the guide rail 100 collides with the main display unit 87. The stopper member is a cushioning member arranged near the tip of the guide rail 100, and the game ball that collides with the stopper member flows down the game area PE after its momentum is weakened. That is, the stopper member is provided with a de-energizing function that weakens the momentum of the colliding game ball.

Here, the main display unit 87 will be supplementarily described. The main display unit 87 is embedded in the game area partition member 99, and a part thereof is arranged so as to face the glass unit 22. A main display unit for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like is provided on the facing portions. The main display unit 87 is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the display content of the main display unit is controlled by the main control device.

The main display unit is for the upper operating port display unit that displays the lottery result based on the winning of the upper operating port 83a, and for the lower operating port that displays the lottery result performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 83b. It has a display unit. In the display unit for the upper operating port, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the upper operating port 83a, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 83a is performed. The result is specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operating port 83a is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the variable display is stopped on the display unit for the upper operating port, and the stop result is predetermined. After the pattern of is displayed, the mode shifts to the above-mentioned open / close execution mode.

In the display unit for the lower operating port, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the lower operating port 83b, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 83b is performed. The result is specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the lower operating port 83b is the winning result corresponding to the big hit, the variable display is stopped on the display unit for the lower operating port, and a predetermined pattern is displayed as the stop result. After that, the mode shifts to the above-mentioned open / close execution mode according to the result.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 83a and 83b, the variable display is started on the corresponding operating port display unit, and after the pattern corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the pattern is stopped. Until the predetermined stop display time (stop display period or final display period) elapses (until the final display ends) while being displayed, it corresponds to one game. However, one game round is not limited to the above contents, and for example, a single display area is provided, and even if any of the operating ports 83a and 83b is won a prize, the single display area is provided. In a configuration in which the variable display is performed in the display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, the variable display is stopped with the predetermined stop result displayed, and then the final display is completed. It is also possible to set one of the game times.

Further, in addition to the above both display units, the main display unit 87 is provided with a through gate display unit that displays the lottery result based on the winning of the through gate 84. In the through gate display unit, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the through gate 84, and as the stop result of the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 84 is clearly shown. Will be done. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display unit and the variable display is displayed. After being stopped, it shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 91 provided in the lower operating port 83b is opened in a predetermined manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is held up to 4 times, but the number of times held is displayed on the main display unit of the main display unit 87. A display unit for the number of holdings is provided.

The main display unit described in detail above can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball is prevented from moving in front of these various display units. Therefore, its visibility is guaranteed.

Explaining the configuration of the inner frame 13 again with reference to FIG. 5, a game ball is launched into the game area PE below the game board unit 80 in the inner frame base body 50 based on the operation of the game ball launch handle 41. A game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided.

(Game ball launch mechanism 110)
The game ball launch mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball arranged at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines a launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. A ball feeding device 113 for supplying balls and a base plate 114 on which these various configurations 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as a main configuration, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base body 50 to form the same. It is integrated with the inner frame base body 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in a state of being inclined obliquely so as to be inclined upward toward the game area forming body 80a side. A groove portion having a substantially V-shaped cross section is formed on the launch rail 112, and the front-rear position of the game ball is defined by fitting the game ball into the groove-shaped portion.

At a position closer to the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the launch rail 112, a ball stopper that holds the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 to the launch standby position described above is arranged. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream from the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply / emission control device described later. The output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion / contraction direction based on the output of the electric signal from the power supply / launch control device, so that the game ball placed in the launch standby position is on the game area forming body 80a side, in detail. Is launched toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the game area forming body 80a.

The guide rail 100 is formed by partitioning the game area PE together with the game area partition member 99 fixed to the game area forming body 80a (specifically, the front surface of the plate body) so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. There is. Further, the guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged so as to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the guide passage 103 is formed by the two rails 101 and 102. Has been done. The guidance passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 opened to the tip end side (obliquely downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit portion 105 located above the game area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → the guidance rail 100 (entrance portion 104 → exit portion 105). In the game area forming body 80a, on the front side of the exit portion 105, specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101, a reversion prevention member 106 for preventing the reversion of the game ball that has reached the game area PE into the guidance passage 103. Is attached, and it is suppressed that the game ball that has reached the game area PE first prevents the subsequent launch of the game ball from being hindered.

Each of the rails 101 and 102 constituting the guide rail 100 has an arc shape centered on a substantially central portion of the game area PE. Therefore, the game ball passing through the guide passage 103 is likely to move (slide or roll) along the outer rail 102, that is, while in contact with the outer rail 102, due to the centrifugal force generated by itself. That is, when the game ball is launched so as to deliver the game ball to the game area PE, the area along the outer rail 102 in the guidance passage 103 constitutes a passage area (passage path) through which the game ball substantially passes. However, the region along the inner rail 101 is substantially a region through which the game ball does not pass.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112, the inlet portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 diagonally face each other with the lower end edge of the game area forming body 80a interposed therebetween. Is located in. That is, both of the rails 100 and 112 are arranged so that the inlet portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are displaced to the left and right in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the game area forming body 80a. As a result, both rails 100 and 112 are brought closer to the lower end edge of the game area forming body 80a, and a gap of a predetermined interval is formed between the inlet portion 104 of the guidance rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage is arranged below the gap formed in this way. The foul ball passage is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 110 does not reach the game area PE and returns in the guidance passage 103 as a foul ball, the foul ball enters the foul ball passage through the gap. Become. The foul ball passage leads to the lower plate passage on the front door side, and the game ball that has entered the foul ball passage is discharged to the lower plate 34 shown in FIG. As a result, the interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be launched next is suppressed.

A rail cover 107 is provided at the left end of the game area forming body 80a so as to cover the outer rail 102 from the side. The game board unit 80 is often handled as a single unit during manufacturing or maintenance work, and at this time, the outer rail 102 may collide with the game table or the like. The rail cover 107 is a member mounted in view of such circumstances, and is provided with a protective function for preventing the outer rail 102 from being deformed due to the above factors or the like.

In the inner frame base body 50, a through hole is formed on the left side of the launch rail 112 (specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14) to penetrate the inner frame base body 50 in the front-rear direction. A passage forming member 121 is arranged in the door. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base body 50, and has a main body side upper plate passage 122 and a main body side lower plate passage 123. The upstream side of the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 leads to a game ball distribution unit described later. Further, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage 122. A front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage 123.

In the inner frame base body 50, below the passage forming member 121, an opening / closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 is attached. The opening / closing member 124 is urged at a front position for closing the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123, and when the front door frame 14 is opened, each opening / closing member 124 is urged by this urging force. By being in the closed state, the game balls are prevented from falling out from the passages 122 and 123. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the urging force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage communicate with each other.

Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (inner frame base body 50 and game board unit 80) will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in FIG. 8, a bearing metal fitting 132 is attached to the rotation base end side (right side in FIG. 8) on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50. A bearing portion 133 is formed on the bearing metal fitting 132 so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions 133. Further, on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50, a plurality of fixing levers 134 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in a closed state are provided.

As described above, the bottom portion of the accommodating recess (game board accommodating portion) 51 in the inner frame base body 50 penetrates in the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50 and is opened to the back side of the inner frame base body 50. A window hole 52 is formed, and the window hole 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by a game board unit 80 housed in the storage recess 51. Various configurations such as a control device are mounted on the back surface of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80b), and these various configurations are exposed to the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board unit 80 will be described.

As described above, the back block 80b is attached to the back surface of the game area forming body 80a. The back block 80b has a substantially box-shaped base body 251 open to the game area forming body 80a side, and the base body 251 is fixed to the back surface of the game area forming body 80a to form a game area. The body 80a and the back block 80b are integrated.

The front side of the base body 251 is an arrangement area for a movable effect mechanism, a decorative member capable of emitting light, and the like, and the back side thereof is a control device for controlling various configurations and the variable display unit 252 (design display device). It is the arrangement area of 253).

More specifically, a part of the base body 251 protrudes to the back side of the inner frame base body 50, and the above-mentioned symbol display device 253 (see FIG. 6) and the symbol display device thereof with respect to the protruding portion. A display control device for driving the 253 is attached. The symbol display device 253 and the display control device are arranged so as to be stacked so that the symbol display device is on the front side and the display control device is on the rear side in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50). Further, a notification / effect control device 140 is mounted on the back surface of the base body 251 so as to be located behind the display control device.

The notification / effect control device 140 includes a notification / effect control board that controls voice output, lamp display, and control of the display control device according to instructions from the main control device described later, and the notification / effect control board is transparent. It is housed in a substrate box 141 made of a resin material or the like.

Below the notification / effect control device 140, a main control device unit 160 is provided so as to cover the base body 96 from the rear. The main control device unit 160 has a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the back surface of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the back block 80b) and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. There is. The main control device 162 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 163 made of the above.

The substrate box 163 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a box sealing portion 164 as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of box sealing portions 164 are provided on the short side portions of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box sealing portion 164 as long as the box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be opened, but the box is formed by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole portion constituting the box sealing portion 164. The base and the box cover are combined so that they cannot be opened. The sealing process by the box sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the illegal opening is performed. Even after opening the package, it is possible to perform the sealing process again. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking pin into at least one locking hole of the plurality of box sealing portions 164. When the board box 163 is opened when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the connecting portion between the box sealing portion into which the locking pin is inserted and the main body of the board box 163 is formed. To disconnect. As a result, the box base of the board box 163 and the box cover are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If the history of opening the board box 163 is left in the board box 163, it is easy to find out that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 163.

The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are connected to each other by a pedestal sealing portion 165 so as not to be opened. Specifically, the pedestal sealing portion 165 has a locking hole portion and a locking pin as in the box sealing portion 164, and the locking pin is inserted into the locking hole portion to form a board box 163. It is designed to be inseparably coupled to the mounting base 161. This makes it easier to grasp the fact when the board box 163 is illegally removed.

In the front part of the main control device 162 (the part facing the rear of the gaming machine) where the overlap with the back pack 201, which will be described later, is avoided, there is a key hole 167 through which the setting change key is inserted, and the setting is changed. A switch 166 and a set value display unit 168 are provided. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is provided in a plurality of stages (specifically, three stages), and the setting change key inserted through the key hole 167 is arranged at the ON position. The set value is changed by operating the setting change switch 166 in the set state (ON state). While the setting change key is placed in the ON position, the currently selected setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 168, and the operator can change the setting while visually checking the setting value. It has become.

The portion of the front surface of the base body 251 facing the lower back surface of the game area forming body 80a corresponds to the game board openings of the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating ports 83a and 83b, and is downstream. A collection passage (not shown) that gathers at one place on the side is formed. As a result, all the game balls that have won the general winning opening 81 or the like are gathered below the game board unit 80 via the collection passage. That is, the base body 251 is provided with a function of collecting the game balls that have won prizes in various winning openings.

A discharge passage, which will be described later, is arranged below the game board unit 80, and the game balls gathered below the game board unit 80 are led out into the discharge passage by the collection passage. The out port 89 is also connected to the discharge passage, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports is led out into the discharge passage through the out port 89.

Further, in the base body 251 constituting the back block 80b, as the detection sensor for each of the above-mentioned ball entry portions, a general winning opening detection sensor for detecting the game ball winning in the general winning opening 81 and an operating port 83a , 83b is equipped with a detection sensor for the operating port that detects the game ball, and these various detection sensors constitute a winning detection mechanism. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device 162, and detection information (detection signal) is output from each detection sensor to the main control device 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201 as a main body of the back pack unit 15, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board, and a control device collecting unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201. ..

The back pack 201 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 10, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. It has 212 and. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 252 (see FIG. 9).

An external output terminal plate 213 is provided on the upper portion of the base portion 211. Various output terminals are provided on the external output terminal plate 213, and the wiring WH1 connecting the management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side and the pachinko machine 10 is connected to these output terminals. Various signals output from the external output terminal plate 213 (output terminal) of the pachinko machine 10 are transmitted to the hall computer HC through the wiring WH1, and the hall computer HC determines the state and game status of the pachinko machine 10 based on these various signals. It is structured to grasp.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower hooking pins 214 at the right end portion when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the hooking pins 214 are provided on the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by being inserted through the portion 133. The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions through which the fixing lever 134 provided in the inner frame 13 is inserted, and the fixed lever 134 is inserted into the insertion portion and hits the base portion 211 from behind. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by being in contact with the inner frame 13.

The payout mechanism portion 202 is arranged on the base portion 211 so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism unit 202 is provided with a tank 221 arranged at the uppermost part of the back pack 201 and opened upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. NS. A tank rail 222 that gently inclines toward the downstream side is connected to the side of the tank 221 and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A payout device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223. The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution section 225 provided on the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 224.

The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function for distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to any of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, or the discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is the main body described above. It is formed so that it leads to the upper plate 33 via the side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage, and the outer opening leads to the lower plate 34 via the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage. Has been done.

A discharge passage board and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion back and forth. The discharge passage board is formed with a discharge passage that is open to the rear on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island equipment of the game hall, etc., and the game ball led out from the above-mentioned collection passage or the like to the discharge passage passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. It is discharged.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241, and the payout control device 242 and the power supply / emission control device 243 are mounted on the mounting base 241. The payout control device 242 and the power supply / launch control device 243 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 242 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 is housed in the board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box 244. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout device 224, the ball jam is cleared.

In the power supply / launch control device 243, the power supply / launch control board is housed in the board box 246. A predetermined power source required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the power supply / launch control board, and the launch of the game ball is controlled by the player operating the game ball launch handle 41. Specifically, the drive control of the solenoid 111 constituting the game ball launch mechanism 110 and the drive control of the ball feeding device 113 are executed.

Further, the power supply / emission control device 243 is provided with a power supply switch 247. By operating the power switch 247, the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state (on state) and a cutoff state (off state).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and holding function for various data, retains the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and returns to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. You can do it. For example, when the power is shut off in the normal procedure as in the case of the closing of the game hall, the state before the shutoff is stored in memory. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch (not shown) provided in the main control device 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches and the setting change switch 166 described above can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine by opening the main portion 12 (inner frame 13) of the gaming machine to expose the back portion of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, in a state where the opening of the gaming machine main portion 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, those switches and the like cannot be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. That is, the above-mentioned various switches are difficult to operate when the game machine main unit 12 is closed, and are operated from the front side of the game machine by a person who does not have a key for the locking device 75 (for example, a cheating person). Is difficult.

(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block of FIG.

The MPU 402 is mounted on the main control board 401 provided in the main control device 162. The MPU 402 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a ROM 403 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 402 and a control program stored in the ROM 403. It is an element having a built-in RAM 404, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. It should be noted that a configuration may be configured in which a part of the functions of the MPU 402, for example, the function of the ROM 403 and the function of the RAM 404 are provided as another element.

The MPU 402 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 405, a payout control device 242, various detection sensors, and the like provided in the main control device 162 are connected to the input side of the MPU 402. A power supply / emission control device 243 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 405, and power is supplied to the MPU 402 via the power failure monitoring board 405.

As a part of various detection sensors, a prize detection sensor 391a that detects a ball (winning) in the general winning opening 81, a prize detection sensor 391b that detects a ball (winning) in the variable winning device 82, and a variable winning device 82. The winning detection sensor 391c that detects the entry (winning) into the (large winning opening), the winning detection sensor 391d that detects the entry (winning) into the upper operating opening 83a, and the winning (winning) into the lower operating opening 83b. The winning detection sensor 391e for detecting the above and the winning detection sensor 391f for detecting the entry (winning) to the through gate 84 are connected, and the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 is connected to the winning determination (winning determination) for each winning portion. ) Is performed. Further, in the MPU 402, the jackpot generation lottery is executed based on the winning of the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b, and the support generating lottery is executed based on the winning of the through gate 84.

A power failure monitoring board 405, a payout control device 242, and a notification / effect control device 140 are connected to the output side of the MPU 402. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 242, for example, based on the result of winning determination to the prize-winning ball-winning units such as the above-mentioned operating ports 83a and 83b. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referred to when the prize ball command is output. Then, when the winning to the general winning opening 81 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 82 is specified, 15 game balls are output. The prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the above is output, and when the prize to the upper operating port 83a is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is output, and the prize to the lower operating port 83b is output. If specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

Various commands such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output from the main control device 162 to the notification / effect control device 140. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various information as information on the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 402, a variable winning drive unit for opening and closing the opening / closing body (for example, the shutter member 88) of the variable winning device 82, an electric accessory driving unit for opening / closing the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b, and an electric accessory driving unit for opening / closing the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b. The main display unit 87 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 401, and the MPU 402 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit is executed in the MPU 402 so that the variable winning device 82 is opened and closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the support lottery for the electric accessory 91 is won, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit is executed in the MPU 402 so that the electric accessory 91 is opened and closed. Further, the MPU 402 executes display control of the main display unit of the main display unit 87.

Further, an external output terminal plate 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 402, and through this external output terminal plate 213, the management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side is informed of the entry into various ball entry sections. Information about lottery results such as jackpots and jackpots is output. This makes it possible for the hall computer HC to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the game situation.

The power failure monitoring board 405 relays the main control board 401 and the power supply / emission control device 243, and the power failure monitoring board 405 has a DC stable 24 volt voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 243. The function to monitor is given. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power supply / launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 401, the payout control device 242, etc. is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do. Further, the power supply / launch control device 243 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

The notification / effect control device 140 is provided with a notification / effect control board on which an MPU is mounted. The MPU is a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM is executed. A certain RAM and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are built in. It is not essential that the ROM and RAM are integrated into one chip for the MPU, and each may be individually chipped. The MPU of the notification / effect control device 140 drives and controls the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also displays the display control device. It controls 410.

The display control device 410 executes the display control of the symbol display device 253 based on the command input from the notification / effect control device 140. In this case, in the notification / effect control device 140, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 253 (for example, the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the content of the reach effect) and the symbol The stop display mode (type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display) is determined.

Here, the configuration related to the variable display of the symbol of each game and the content of the variable display will be described. In the following description, FIGS. 12 and 13 will be referred to as appropriate. 12 and 13 are schematic views for explaining the display contents on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253.

The display control device 410 is provided with a character ROM. In the character ROM, data of nine types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" (see FIGS. 12 (a) to (i)) and data of sub-symbols without numbers are attached. (See FIG. 12 (j)) is stored in advance.

As shown in FIG. 13A, on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen 253a, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity.

In the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13B, on the display screen 253a, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be done. Further, on the display screen 253a, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols with the same number) is formed on one of the effective lines. When the variation display of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is completed in this state, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the probabilistic jackpot result.

In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). 2 pattern rows), middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a third symbol row (or a third symbol row).

Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a probability variation jackpot result occurs, for example, the same specific symbol The combination of is stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, for example, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Will be done.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 253 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set to be arranged side by side, and the direction of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol row may be set to the vertical direction.

(About various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 402 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, set the display of the main display unit 87 (main display unit), set the symbol display of the symbol display device 253, and the like. As shown in FIG. 14, the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for generating jackpots, the hit type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot result, and the symbol display device 253 are disengaged. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach lottery when fluctuating, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the fluctuation in the operation port display unit and the symbol display device 253 of the main display unit 87. A variable type counter CS that determines the display time (variable display period) is used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b is set to the electric service open state is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 404. The RAM 404 is provided with a holding ball storage area 432 including an upper working port holding area Ra, a lower working port holding area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total holding number storage area. Then, in the reserved ball storage area 432, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are time-series in accordance with the winning history of the game ball to the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b. It is designed to be stored as a target.

More specifically, the hit random number counter C1 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, reach the maximum value (that is, 599), and then return to 0. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b. More specifically, it is stored in the upper operating port holding area Ra of the RAM 404 when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 83a, and is stored in the lower operating port holding area Rb of the RAM 404 when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 83b. Stored in.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 421 as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 403. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low-probability mode (low-probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high-probability mode (high-probability pass / fail information group) are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means. The hit / fail table for the low probability mode and the hit / miss table for the high probability mode are provided for each set value, and the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value (see FIG. 15). Specifically, the pass / fail table for the low-probability mode and the pass / fail table for the high-probability mode corresponding to the setting 1, the pass / fail table for the low-probability mode and the pass / fail table for the high-probability mode corresponding to the setting 2, and the pass / fail table for the low-probability mode corresponding to the setting 3 A pass / fail table and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode are provided.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table (FIG. 16A) for the low probability mode corresponding to the setting 1 is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that wins the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7". , "107", "207", "307", "407", "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results, and those Other than the random number value, it corresponds to the outlier result. As a result, the jackpot probability is 1/100.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table (FIG. 16B) for the low probability mode corresponding to the setting 2 is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that wins the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7". , "107", "307", "407", "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results, and other than those random numbers. Corresponds to the off result. As a result, the jackpot probability is 1/120.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table (FIG. 16A) for the low probability mode corresponding to the setting 3 is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that wins the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7". , "107", "307", "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "307", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results, and the values other than those random numbers are out of order. It corresponds. As a result, the jackpot probability is 1/150.

In this way, the difference is provided so that the player is advantageous in the order of setting 3 <setting 2 <setting 1, and the player who wants to advance the game as much as possible is expected to be set 1. Is supposed to do.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table (FIG. 17 (a)) for the high probability mode corresponding to the setting 1 is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that wins the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7". , "36", "107", "207", "307" ... "407", "507". There are 19 of "598". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "36", "107", "207", "307" ... "407", "507". "598" corresponds to the jackpot result, and the values other than those random numbers correspond to the outlier results. As a result, the jackpot probability is about 1/32.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table (FIG. 17 (b)) for the high probability mode corresponding to the setting 2 is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that wins the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7". , "36", "107", "207", "307" ... "407", "507". There are 20 of "598". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "36", "107", "207", "307" ... "407", "507". "598" corresponds to the jackpot result, and the values other than those random numbers correspond to the outlier results. As a result, the jackpot probability is 1/30.

In the game state in which the winning / failing table (FIG. 17 (c)) for the high probability mode corresponding to the setting 3 is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that wins the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7". , "36", "107", "207", "307" ... "407", "507". There are 21 of "598". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "36", "107", "207", "307" ... "407", "507". "598" corresponds to the jackpot result, and the values other than those random numbers correspond to the outlier results. As a result, the jackpot probability is about 1/28.

The fact that the relationship between advantages and disadvantages in the high-probability mode is reversed from that in the low-probability mode is a device for suppressing an excessive bias in the degree of advantage. Even if the difference in the high probability mode is taken into consideration, the difference in the low probability mode in which the game progresses is predominant, and it is generally advantageous for the player in the order of setting 3 <setting 2 <setting 1. ..

It is also possible to match the advantage / disadvantage relationship in the high probability mode with the advantage / disadvantage relationship in the low probability mode. That is, it is also possible to set so that the jackpot probability increases in the order of setting 3 <setting 2 <setting 1.

Incidentally, if the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

The hit type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value (that is, 29), and then return to 0. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are different in two conditions: (1) a lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (2) a support mode by the electric accessory 91 after the opening / closing execution mode ends. ..

As the support mode in the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b, the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b is compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched in the same manner with respect to the game area PE. Low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) so that the frequency of opening is relatively high or low per unit time. ) And are set.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory release counter C4 is the same, but the frequency is high. In the support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 91 is in the open state when the electric accessory open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and one opening time is set longer. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric accessory 91 is won in the open state and the electric accessory 91 is opened a plurality of times, it is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory opening lottery to be held after one electric accessory opening lottery is set is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode. Has been done.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the lower operating port 83b will be won is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper operating port 83a is higher than that of the lower operating port 83b, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 83b is more likely than the upper operating port 83a. The probability of winning a prize increases. Then, when a prize is won in the lower operating port 83b, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. be able to.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, the electric accessory open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in. Further, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode may be set by differentiating any one condition or any combination of the number of times, the opening time, and the winning probability.

The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the game ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b wins a prize. More specifically, it is stored in the upper operating port holding area Ra of the RAM 404 when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 83a, and is stored in the lower operating port holding area Rb of the RAM 404 when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 83b. Stored in.

The distribution destination of the game result with respect to the hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 422 as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 403. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. As the distribution table, the distribution table for the upper operating port (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 18A and the distribution table for the lower operating port shown in FIG. 18B (second distribution). Minute information group) and is set.

In the distribution table for the upper operating port, the 8R probability variation jackpot result (high probability correspondence special game result), the 8R normal jackpot result (low probability correspondence special game result), and the 4R probability variation jackpot result (high) are distributed to the game result. Probability-corresponding game result), 4R normal jackpot result (low-probability-corresponding game result) is set. Specifically, in the distribution table for the upper operating port, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 8" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot result, and "9 to 14". "Corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot result," 15-23 "corresponds to the 4R probability variation jackpot result, and" 24-29 "corresponds to the 4R normal jackpot result.

In the distribution table for the lower operating port, 16R probability variation jackpot result (high probability correspondence special game result), 8R probability variation jackpot result (high probability correspondence special game result), 8R normal jackpot result (low) are distributed to the game result. Probability-corresponding special game results), 4R probability variation jackpot results (high-probability-corresponding game results), and 4R normal jackpot results (low-probability-corresponding game results) are set. Specifically, in the distribution table for the lower operating port, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 5" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result, and "6 to 11". "Corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot result," 12-17 "corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot result," 18-23 "corresponds to the 4R probability variation jackpot result, and" 24-29 "corresponds to the 4R probability variation jackpot result. It corresponds to the 4R normal jackpot result.

The 16R probability variation jackpot result, the 8R probability variation jackpot result, and the 4R probability variation jackpot result are jackpot results in which the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. As shown in FIG. 18C, this high-frequency support mode is continued until the next big hit result, and shifts to the low-frequency support mode with the start of the open / close execution mode.

The 8R normal jackpot result and the 4R normal jackpot result are jackpot results in which the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. However, as shown in FIG. 18C, in this high-frequency support mode, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) or the said If a big hit result is obtained before the end reference number of times is reached (specifically, when the open / close execution mode is started), the game ends and the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b. More specifically, it is stored in the upper operating port holding area Ra of the RAM 404 when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 83a, and is stored in the lower operating port holding area Rb of the RAM 404 when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 83b. Stored in. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate the reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 403.

However, in the game round that shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 402 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, the reach display (reach state) is provided with a symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture), and the game result is compatible with the open / close execution mode. In the game times that are the game results, in the gaming machine where the stop display result after the variation display can be the special display result, the stop display result after the variation display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 253 is started Refers to a display state for making the player think that the special display result is likely to be a variable display state before the derivation display is performed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established. It is a display state in which a combination of possible reach symbols is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variation display of the symbol, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established on the preset effective line in the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of possible reach symbols, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

Explaining the display contents on the display screen 253a in more detail, one of the effective lines is hit in a state where the variation display of the symbol is first completed in the upper symbol row Z1 and then the variation display of the symbol is completed in the lower symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbol with a number that constitutes the combination of symbols, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the variation display of the symbol is performed in the middle symbol row Z2. This will be the reach display. Then, when a big hit occurs, the main symbol forming the reach line and the main symbol with the numbers constituting the combination of the hit symbols are stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the symbol changes in the middle symbol row Z2. The display ends.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. Includes those that perform an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 253a after reducing or hiding the combination of reach symbols. In addition, when the reach display is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to perform the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. You may.

The variation type counter CS has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), it returns to 0. The variation type counter CS determines in the MPU 402 the variation display time in the display unit for the upper operating port and the display unit for the lower operating port of the main display unit 87 (main display unit) and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 253. It is used in order to do so. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the start of the variation display on the upper operating port display unit and the lower operating port display unit and at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 253.

The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value (that is, 250), and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 433 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b to the open state according to the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the electric accessory 91 is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the electric accessory 91 is not controlled to the open state.

As described above, in the MPU 402, at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is used to determine the variation display time in the upper actuating port display unit and the lower actuating port display unit. The variable display time table storage area 423 is used. Further, in the MPU 402, the stop result in the upper operating port display unit and the lower operating port display unit is determined by using the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, in making the determination, the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403 is used.

(About various processes executed by the main controller 162)
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described. Regarding the processing executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, the main processing started when the power is turned on, the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing executed to advance the game in each game round, and the NMI terminal. It is roughly divided into NMI interrupt processing that is activated by inputting a power failure signal to (non-maskable terminal). Hereinafter, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Main processing)
In the main process, first, in step S101, the start-up process accompanying the power-on (power ON operation) is executed. Specifically, for example, it waits for about 500 msec to wait for various control base devices (payout control device 242, etc.) on the slave side to be in an operable state.

In the following step S102, it is determined whether or not 1 sec, which is the permission prohibition period, has elapsed since the start-up process of step S101. If 1 sec has not elapsed, the process of step S102 is executed again. This time is measured by counting the number of processes in step S102. For example, if the time required from the negative determination in step S102 to the execution of the process of step S102 again is 0.1 msec, the count value becomes 10,000 times, and after the start-up process of step S101. It is determined that 1 sec has passed since. The specific configuration of the time measurement is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock. If it is determined in step S102 that 1 sec has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, access to the RAM 404 is permitted. After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply / firing control device 243 is turned on, and in the following step S105, whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 404. Is determined. Further, in step S106, the RAM determination value is calculated, and in the subsequent step S107, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 404. It is also possible to determine the validity of the stored data based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 404 are correctly stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch provided in the main control device. If the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to steps S108 to S109. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality of the stored data is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to steps S108 to S109 in the same manner.

In step S108, the used area of RAM 404 is cleared to 0, and in step S109, the initialization process of RAM 404 is executed. After that, the initial command setting process is executed to output the initial command to the payout control device 242 in step S110, the interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to the normal process described later. The MPU of the payout control device 242 recognizes that communication with the main control device 162 is normally performed by inputting an initial command from the main control device 162.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, the power failure flag storage area is stored in step S112, provided that the power failure flag is stored and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Clear the power failure flag stored in. After that, the initial command is output in step S110, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later. As a result, the state before the power is cut off is restored.

(Timer interrupt processing)
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically started by the MPU 402 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S201, reading processing of various winning detection sensors (for example, the detection sensors 391a to 391f) is executed. That is, the state of various winning detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, the state of the winning detection sensor is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

After that, in step S202, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

In the following step S203, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

In the following step S204, a winning process for thru accompanying the winning of the thru gate 84 is executed. In the through winning process, it is determined whether or not the through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the electric service holding area 433. The value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S203 is stored in the electric service holding area on condition that the number of stored items held is less than 4. When the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 435, the winning detection flag for the through gate is deleted and the winning process for the through gate is completed.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S204, the process proceeds to step S205, and in step S205, the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 83a and 83b is executed. After that, the winning process for the large winning opening is executed in step S206, the winning process for the general winning opening is executed in step S207, and then the timer interrupt process is terminated.

In the winning process for the big winning opening, a prize ball command for the big winning opening is transmitted to the payout control device 242 and the notification / effect control device 140. The payout control device 242 performs a process of paying out a number (15) of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the large winning opening based on the reception of the winning ball command for the large winning opening. In the present embodiment, during the opening / closing execution mode, the total number of prize balls acquired during the opening / closing execution mode is displayed on the symbol display device 253, and the notification / effect control device 140 is used for a large prize opening. Display processing such as the total number of payouts is performed based on the receipt of the prize ball command.

In the winning process for the general winning opening, a prize ball command for the general winning opening is transmitted to the payout control device 242 and the notification / effect control device 140. The payout control device 242 performs a process of paying out a number (10) of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the general winning opening 81 based on the reception of the winning ball command for the general winning opening. In the present embodiment, during the opening / closing execution mode, the total number of prize balls acquired during the opening / closing execution mode is displayed on the symbol display device 253, and the notification / effect control device 140 is used for a general winning opening. Display processing such as the total number of payouts is performed based on the receipt of the prize ball command.

Although the details will be described later, various prize ball commands are output not only to the payout control device 242 and the notification / effect control device 140 but also to the monitoring device, and in the monitoring device, each ball is entered based on the prize ball command. It is structured to memorize the number of prizes won in the club.

(Prize processing for the operating port)
Here, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 21 and 22.

In step S301, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (winned) the upper operating port 83a. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a, the process proceeds to step S302, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 242 to pay out three game balls (a prize ball command for the upper operating port). ) Is set.

In the following step S303, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC grasps that the ball has entered the upper operating port 83a. After that, in step S304, information acquisition processing for storing each value such as the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter C2 is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S301 that the game ball has not won the upper operating port 83a, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (winned) the lower operating port 83b. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b, the process proceeds to step S306, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 242 to pay out four game balls (a prize ball command for the lower operating port). ) Is set. The prize ball command set in steps S302 and S306 is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in the external output process S401 of the normal process described later.

In the following step S307, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC grasps that the ball has entered the lower operating port 83b. After that, the information acquisition process is performed in step S304, and the main winning process is completed.

If a negative determination is made in both the processes of steps S301 and S305, that is, if there is no ball in any of the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

Here, the information acquisition process in step S304 will be described with reference to FIG. 22.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S401, the operation hold storage number N stored in the hold number storage area of the hold ball storage area 432, specifically, the trigger of the information acquisition process among the upper operation port 83a and the lower operation port 83b. It is determined whether or not the operation hold memory number N related to the ball entry portion becomes less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). If the operation hold storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the operation hold storage number N of the corresponding operation port is incremented by 1 in step S402. , The total number of holds stored in the hold number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the common hold number CRN) is incremented by 1 in step S403.

In the following step S404, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS updated in step S203 are stored in the free storage area of the hold area RE for the operation port. It is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the common hold number CRN incremented by 1 in step S402. After executing the storage process, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, the display update processing of the first hold lamp unit 98a and the second hold lamp unit 98b as the hold number display unit is executed. In the display update process, when the current entry destination (winning destination) is the upper operating port 83a, the display of the first hold lamp unit 98a is updated, and the current entry destination (winning destination) is the lower operating port 83b. In that case, the display of the second hold lamp unit 98b is updated.

The first holding lamp unit 98a is composed of four LEDs, and the number of lit LEDs and the number of holdings related to the upper operating port 83a match. When the number of holdings related to the upper operating port 83a increases due to this winning, a process of increasing the number of lit LEDs is performed accordingly. Similarly, the second holding lamp unit 98b is also composed of four LEDs, and the number of lit LEDs and the number of holdings related to the lower operating port 83b match. When the number of holdings related to the lower operating port 83b increases due to this winning, a process of increasing the number of lit LEDs is performed accordingly.

In the following step S406, a hold command is a process for causing the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410, which are the control devices on the sub side (sub side), to recognize that the operation ports 83a and 83b have been won. Executes the setting process of, and ends this information acquisition process. It should be noted that the hold command includes information on which of the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b is based on the winning of the ball entry portion.

The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S407 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in the external output process (step S501) of the normal process described later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process started after the main process is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S501 to S507 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S509 and S510 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, first, the external signal output processing is executed in step S501. In the external signal output process of step S501, output data such as a timer interrupt process or a command set in the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side and the hall computer HC.

Specifically, the presence / absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 242 and the notification / effect control device 140. In addition, if various commands such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, and other effects commands, a hold command, and a shift command, which will be described later, are set, they are transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140. .. Further, for example, every time the display unit for the operation port of the main display unit finishes displaying the fluctuation of the symbol, an external signal indicating that the symbol is confirmed is output to the hall computer HC, and the open / close execution mode is in effect during the open / close execution mode. The external signal shown is output to the hall computer HC, and when the high frequency support mode is in effect, the external signal indicating that the high frequency support mode is in effect is output to the hall computer HC.

Next, in step S502, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

In the following step S503, a game turn control process for controlling the game in each game turn is executed. In this game time control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 253, display control of the main display unit 87, and the like are performed.

After executing the game turn control process in step S503, the process proceeds to step S504 to execute the game state transition process. The details will be described later, but by this game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game turn control process in step S503 and the game state transition process in step S504 will be described later.

In the following step S505, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 91 attached to the lower operating port 83b is executed. In this electric service support process, the electric service is released depending on whether or not the electric service 91 is opened by using the numerical information acquired from the electric service release counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 433 of the RAM 404. A lottery is performed, and when the electric accessory is won in the open state, the electric accessory 91 is opened and closed. In addition, the display control of the through-gate display unit in the main display unit is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric service opening lottery.

As described above, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set as the support modes by the electric accessory 91, and the game state transition process shifts to one of the support modes. Through this process, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, the high-frequency support mode is set, and when the flag is not set, the low-frequency support mode is set.

In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Then, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 91 is in the open state is set more than in the case of the low-frequency support mode, and once the electric accessory 91 is in the open state. Set a long opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric accessory open state is won and the electric accessory 91 is opened a plurality of times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. The closing time is set to be shorter than the one-time opening time.

By the way, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404.

In the following step S506, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is operated once in a predetermined interval period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that the launch permission signal is input from the power supply / launch control device 243. Excite. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

After that, the setting change process is executed in step S507. In the setting change process, the lottery table to be referred to is switched so that the lottery table corresponding to the set value selected by the hall manager or the like is referred to. Details of this setting change process will be described later.

In the following step S508, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not one cycle (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached.

That is, in step S509, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 404. Further, in step S510, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is added by 1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 404.

Since the execution time of each process of steps S501 to S507 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

(Game times control process)
Next, the game rotation control process in step S503 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 24 to 27.

In the game time control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 24, it is determined in step S601 whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. When the open / close execution mode is in progress, the main game rotation is performed without executing any of the processes after step S602, that is, the game rotation start processing of steps S603 to S605 and the game rotation progress processing of steps S606 to S609. End the control process.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the game is being played. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 87 is in the variable display or the final display. If it is not during the game round, the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S603 to S605. In the game round start process, first, in step S603, it is determined whether or not the total number of start hold balls (common hold number CRN) is "0". When the common hold number CRN is "0", it means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 432. Therefore, the main game times control process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the common hold number CRN is not "0", the data setting process for setting the data stored in the hold area RE of the hold ball storage area 432 for the variable display is executed in step S604. Further, in step S605, after executing the fluctuation start processing for starting the fluctuation display of the operation port display unit in the main display unit 87 and the fluctuation display of the symbol display device 253, the game round control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S604 and the fluctuation start process in step S605 will be described in detail. First, the data setting process in step S604 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S701, among the operation hold storage numbers N stored in the hold number storage area FE, the one that is the target of the current setting process and the common hold number CRN are decremented by one. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the lower operation port (see FIG. 14), that is, the number N of hold storage for the lower operation port (the number of hold storages RbN for the lower operation port) is "0". do. When the reserved storage number RbN for the lower operating port is "0", the data setting process related to the display unit for the upper operating port is executed, and when the reserved storage number RbN for the lower operating port is not "0", the lower operating port is operated. Executes the data setting process related to the mouth display unit.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common hold number is 1 or more as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number RbN for the lower operating port is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, the holding information for variable display of the lower operating port display unit is used. When is stored, the number of hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the upper operating port (see FIG. 14), that is, the number N of hold storage for operation (RaN of hold storage for the upper work port) is 1. Regardless of whether or not it is the above, the data stored in the lower working port holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE for variable display. That is, in step S702, when the holding information is stored in both the holding area Ra for the upper working port and the holding area Rb for the lower working port, the holding information corresponding to the lower working port 83b has priority. It becomes.

In the following step S703, one of the upper operating port holding area Ra and the lower operating port holding area Rb, in which the data moved to the execution area AE is stored, is stored in the first to fourth areas. The data is shifted to the lower area side in order. As a result, for example, as the data in the first area is moved to the execution area AE, the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, and so on. The data is shifted.

In the following step S704, a shift command is set, which is information for causing the notification / effect control device 140 to recognize that the data in the holding area RE has been shifted. After that, this data setting process is terminated. The shift command set in step S704 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 23). Then, this shift command is transmitted to the display control device 410 via the notification / effect control device 140.

(Fluctuation start processing)
Next, the fluctuation start processing in step S605 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the variation start process, first, in step S801, a win / fail determination process for determining whether or not the hold information referred to in the current variation start process corresponds to the jackpot winning is executed. Specifically, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for jackpot determination, that is, the random number value acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is grasped. Then, it is specified whether or not the acquired information is included in the information corresponding to the jackpot winning by referring to the current set value and the lottery table corresponding to the lottery mode. For example, when the set value is "1" and the win / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, the hit / miss table for the low probability mode corresponding to the setting 1 stored in the hit / miss table storage area 421 of the ROM 403 is referred to. It is specified whether the acquired information is included in the information corresponding to the jackpot winning, and when the set value is "1" and the winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode, it is stored in the winning / losing table storage area 421 of the ROM 403. With reference to the winning / failing table for the high-probability mode corresponding to setting 1, it is specified whether or not the acquired information is included in the information corresponding to the jackpot winning.

In the following step S802, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process in step S801 is the result corresponding to the jackpot winning. If the result corresponds to the jackpot winning, the type determination process is executed in step S803.

In the type determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for type determination, that is, the random number value acquired from the hit type counter C2 is grasped. Further, with reference to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 422 of the ROM 403, it is specified whether or not the above-identified information for type determination is included in the information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. For details, if the hold information corresponds to the ball entering the upper operating port 83a, refer to the distribution table for the upper operating port 83a, and the holding information corresponds to the ball entering the lower operating port 83b. If this is the case, the type is determined by referring to the distribution table for the lower operating port 83b.

In the following step S804, it is determined whether or not the type of the current jackpot winning is the probability variation jackpot result (16R probability variation jackpot result, 8R probability variation jackpot result, 4R probability variation jackpot result) based on the information specified in the type determination process in step S803. judge. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot is executed in step S805, and if it is not the probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the normal jackpot is executed in step S806. If it is determined in step S802 that the jackpot is not won, the stop result setting process for the time of loss is executed in step S807.

As described above, the probability variation jackpot results are roughly classified into 16R probability variation jackpot results, 8R probability variation jackpot results, and 4R probability variation jackpot results. In the process of step S805, in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting process corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result is performed, and in the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting process corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot result is performed. In the case of a 4R probability variation jackpot result, a stop result setting process corresponding to the 4R probability variation jackpot result is performed. Further, the normal jackpot result is roughly classified into an 8R normal jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result. In the process of step S806, in the case of the 8R normal jackpot result, the stop result setting process corresponding to the 8R normal jackpot result is performed, and in the case of the 4R normal jackpot result, the stop result setting process corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result is performed. conduct.

In each stop result setting process of steps S805 to S807, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403 is referred to for the information of the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 87. The identified information is stored in the RAM 404. Further, in step S805 and step S806, information for specifying in the MPU 402 that the hit / fail determination result of the current game round is a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is stored in various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S805, any one of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 4R probability variation jackpot flag is stored, and in step S806, any one of the 8R normal jackpot flag and the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes of steps S805 to S807, the variable display time setting process is executed in step S808.

(Variable display time setting process)
In the variable display time setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 27, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the winning or losing lottery has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 4R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R normal jackpot flag, and the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. ..

If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a wrong result, the process proceeds to step S902. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 253 in this game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, an affirmative determination is made in step S802 as the occurrence of reach display. When specifying the presence / absence of reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 403 is referred to.

If an affirmative determination is made in either step S901 or step S902, the process proceeds to step S903, and the current variation display time table for reach generation is referred to in the variation display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403. The fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired, and in the following step S904, the fluctuation display time information is transmitted to the fluctuation display time counter area (variation display time measuring means) provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. ). After that, this setting process ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, the reach display is executed when the result of the winning / failing lottery is the big hit winning result or when the result of the winning / failing lottery is out of order and the lottery for generating reach is won. ing.

Here, the reach display is provided with a normal reach display (specifically, normal reach A to B) and a super reach display (specifically, super reach A to C) in which variable display modes are different from each other. In the variation display time table for reach generation, variation display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set, and by referring to the table, the variation display time information corresponding to each reach display can be obtained. To be acquired. Regarding the determination of the reach display type, a table corresponding to the reach display type and the value of the variation type counter CS is provided, and by referring to the table, the value of the variation type counter CS this time can be used. The corresponding reach display is determined.

More specifically, the variation display time table for reach generation corresponds to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the variable display time is set so that the combination of specific symbols can be stopped and displayed in the case of the probability variation jackpot result, and the combination of non-specific symbols can be stopped and displayed in the case of the normal jackpot result. The variable display time is set to.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S902, the value of the current variation type counter CS is referred to in the variation display time table storage area 423 for non-reach, which is stored in the variation display time table storage area 423 in step S905. The fluctuation display time corresponding to the above is acquired, and the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter area in step S906. After that, this setting process ends.

The variable display time information when the reach does not occur is set so that the larger the number of common hold number CRNs, the shorter the variable display time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of common hold number CRNs may be used, and the variable display time may be set to be shorter as the number of common hold number CRNs is smaller. .. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach is not selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variable display time table for generation is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variable display time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs, and the variable display time that is easy to be selected and the variable display time that is difficult to be selected are different between when the jackpot is won and when the reach is lost. It may be configured. Further, the variable display time table for the probabilistic jackpot, the variable display time table for the normal jackpot, the variable display time table for the missed reach, and the variable display time table for the complete miss may be set individually. As described above, the variation display time of each game is determined by using the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the type of reach display, the number of reserved information, the value of the variation type counter CS, and the like as parameters.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 26), after executing the variation display time setting process in step S808, the variation start command and the type command are set in step S809. The fluctuation start command includes information on whether or not reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time. In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, in the type command, as game result information, 16R probability variation jackpot result information, 8R probability variation jackpot result information, 4R probability variation jackpot result information, 8R normal jackpot result information, 4R normal jackpot result information, missed result Information etc. are included.

The fluctuation start command and the type command set in step S809 are transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 23). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the light emission pattern of the lamp unit 26 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 29 in the game round based on the received fluctuation start command and type command, and the content of the determined effect. The lamp unit 26 and the speaker unit 29 are controlled so that Further, the notification / effect control device 140 transmits the fluctuation start command and the type command to the display control device 410 while maintaining the information form.

The display control device 410 determines the variation display pattern in the symbol display device 253 in the game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and the symbol display device executes the determined variation display pattern. Display control of 253. After that, in step S810, the variation display of the pattern is started on one of the upper actuating port display unit and the lower actuating port display unit of the main display unit 87, and then the variation start processing is ended.

Returning to the description of the game round control process (FIG. 24), when the display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 87 is in the variable display, the game round progress process of steps S606 to S609 is executed. In the game round progress process, first, in step S606, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation display time information stored in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 404 is "0". As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 27). Further, the value of the set fluctuation display time information is decremented (subtracted) by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) is activated.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S607. In the variable display processing, the display mode of the main display unit 87 is changed from the display unit for the upper operation port and the display unit for the lower operation port, whichever is applicable. After that, the game times control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, the variation end process is executed in step S608. In the variable end processing, the information stored in the RAM 404 is specified in any of the processes of steps S805 to S807, and the pattern corresponding to the information corresponds to the upper operating port display unit and the lower operating port display unit. The display unit for the operation port is controlled so that the stop display is displayed on one side.

In the following step S609, a variable end command is set. After that, the game times control process is terminated. The variation end command set in step S609 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 23). The notification / effect control device 140 transmits the received fluctuation end command to the display control device 410 while maintaining the information form. By receiving the fluctuation end command, the display control device 410 makes a definite display (final stop display) of the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S902, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the variation display of the pattern on the display unit for the upper operation port or the display unit for the lower operation port of 1 game times is completed. If it is not the timing when the fluctuation display is finished, the game state transition process is finished as it is.

If the variable display has ended, more specifically, if the preset stop display time (interval time: fixed display time) has elapsed since the variable display ended, the process proceeds to step S1003. It is determined whether or not the game result of the current game times (the result of the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery) corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 4R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R normal jackpot flag, and the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. do. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

When any of the above flags is stored, the start processing of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S1004. By the start processing, the operation restriction of the variable winning device 82 by the lock device is released, and the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 82 is allowed until the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, in the start process of step S1004, the open / close execution mode start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Details will be described later, but this will start the output of an external signal indicating that the hall computer HC has shifted to the open / close execution mode.

In the following step S1005, any one of "4", "8", and "16" is set in the open number counter OC provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. Specifically, when the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, "16" is set in the open number counter OC, and the 8R probability variation jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. When the 8R normal jackpot flag is stored, "8" is set in the open number counter OC, and when the 4R probability variation jackpot flag or the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, it is opened. Set "4" to the number counter OC. The open number counter OC functions as a means for grasping the number of times the variable winning device 82 is opened. After executing the process of step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006 to set the opening command.

This set opening command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 23). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 253, and the determined display mode is output from the notification / effect control device 140 to the display control device 410 as a display content command. In the display control device 410, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification / effect control device 140, the display corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode this time, for example, the display content corresponding to the jackpot The display control of the symbol display device 253 is executed so that the moving image of the character or the like and the background image can be switched. After executing the process of step S1006, the game state transition process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S1001, if it is determined in step S1001 that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1007. In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S1008.

In the large winning opening opening / closing process, first, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening of the variable winning device 82 is open. Specifically, such a determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning drive unit of the variable winning device 82. If the big winning opening is not open, it is determined whether or not the value of the open number counter OC is "0". If the value of the open number counter OC is "0", the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is.

If the value of the open number counter OC is not "0", it is determined whether or not the value of the open timer counter TC is "0". The open timer counter TC is a counter that is referred to when grasping the open period and the closing period (interval period) of the large winning opening, and its value is "1" each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) is executed. It is subtracted one by one. If the value of the open timer counter TC is not "0", the opening / closing process of the winning opening is terminated.

When the value of the open number counter OC is not "0" and the value of the open timer counter TC is "0", the opening process of the large winning opening is executed. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit is set to the driving state in order to open the large winning opening. After that, the closing condition setting process (opening setting process) corresponding to the variable winning device 82 (large winning opening) is performed. Specifically, "15000" (corresponding to 30 sec) is set in the open timer counter TC, and "10" is set in the winning counter PC. After executing this setting process, an open command indicating that the variable winning device 82 (large winning opening) has been opened is set, and the opening / closing process of the large winning opening is completed. This set release command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 23). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the release based on the reception of the release command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the large winning opening of the variable winning device 82 is open, it is determined whether or not the value of the open timer counter TC is "0". When the value of the open timer counter TC is not "0", whether or not the game ball has won the big winning opening is determined based on the detection signal from the winning detection sensor 391c corresponding to the variable winning device 82 (details are described above). (Based on the result of step S206). If no prize has been won, the opening / closing process of the main prize opening is terminated as it is.

When a prize has been awarded to the large prize opening, the prize ball command is output to the payout control device 242 and the notification / effect control device 140. The payout control device 242 performs a process of paying out a preset number of game balls based on the receipt of the prize ball command. In the notification / effect control device 140, when a prize ball command is issued during the open / close execution mode, a process of changing the effect in the open / close execution mode executed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, for example, to indicate the occurrence of a prize. I do.

When a prize is won in the big prize opening, after decrementing the value of the prize counter PC by 1, it is judged whether or not the value of the prize counter PC is "0", and if it is not "0", the book is used as it is. Finish the opening and closing process of the big prize opening. When the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or when it is determined that the value of the opening timer counter TC is "0", it means that the big winning opening closing condition is satisfied. In this case, the variable winning drive unit is set to the non-driving state in order to close the large winning opening.

Subsequently, the update process of the open number counter OC is executed. Specifically, when the value of the open number counter OC is not "0", the open number counter OC is decremented by 1, and when the value of the open number counter OC is "0", the open number counter OC is performed. Keep the value of "0". After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated open number counter OC is "0".
If it is determined that the value of the open number counter OC is not "0", set "1000" (corresponding to 2.0 sec) in the open timer counter TC, set the close command, and then open / close the winning opening. To finish. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 23). When the notification / effect control device 140 receives the closing command, the notification / effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the closing command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the open number counter is "0", the ending start processing is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 403 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

After that, after setting the ending command, the opening / closing process of the winning opening is completed. The set ending command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 23).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 28), after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S1008, it is determined in step S1009 whether or not the value of the open number counter OC is “0”, and the step In S1010, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the open number counter OC is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the open number counter OC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S1011.

In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot result that triggered the open / close execution mode this time is either the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the 8R probability variation jackpot result, or the 4R probability variation jackpot result. .. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 4R probability variation jackpot flag are stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404.

When the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the 8R probability variation jackpot result, and the 4R probability variation jackpot result, the flag related to the transition of the gaming state is deleted. After executing the erasing process, the game state setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-probability mode flag set in this way, the winning / losing table for the high-probability mode will be referred to in the winning / losing lottery in the subsequent game rounds.

After that, the high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode flag set in this way, in the subsequent electric service support processing, the pass / fail table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the support lottery, and the variable display time of the pattern at the time of the support lottery is displayed. It is shortened (specifically set to 2.0 sec), and the period of being in the open state is extended by opening once (specifically set to 5.0 sec).

On the other hand, when the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is the 8R normal jackpot result or the 4R normal jackpot result, that is, the 8R normal jackpot flag or the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If so, the flag related to the transition of the game state is deleted. After executing the erasing process, the game state setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the high-frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode flag set in this way, in the subsequent electric service support processing, the pass / fail table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the support lottery, and the variable display time of the pattern at the time of the support lottery is displayed. It is shortened (specifically set to 2.0 sec), and the period of being in the open state is extended by opening once (specifically set to 5.0 sec).

Unlike the case of the probabilistic jackpot result described above, an upper limit is set for the number of times of support for the high frequency support mode that normally shifts after the jackpot result. Specifically, "100" is set in the game count counter stored in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. As a result, the high-frequency support mode is maintained until the game is played 100 times after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and when the game reaches "100", the high-frequency support mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. ..

After the game state setting process is performed, the open / close execution mode end process is performed in step S1012. Specifically, the open / close execution mode flag, the jackpot flag, and the like stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the jackpot is stopped.

(About the electrical configuration of the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410)
Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 29, the electrical configuration of the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 will be supplementarily described.

The MPU 442 is mounted on the notification / effect control board 441 provided in the notification / effect control device 140. The MPU 442 is a ROM 443 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 442, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 443 is executed. A certain RAM 444 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 443 and the RAM 444 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 442, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of other control devices.

The MPU 442 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442, and receives game times control commands (game times control information) such as the above-mentioned fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command from the main control device 162. .. In addition, it receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, and open / close execution mode commands (open / close execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

As described above, the indicator lamp units 26 to 28, the speaker unit 29, and the display control device 410 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 442. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification / effect control device 140 are transmitted to the display control device 410 while maintaining the information form as it is.

The display control device 410 is a display control board 471 on which an MPU 472, which is an element in which a program ROM 473 and a work RAM 474 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 475, a character ROM 476, and a video RAM 477, respectively, are mounted. It has. It is not essential that the program ROM 473 and the work RAM 474 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 472, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification / effect control device 140, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 475 (specifically). Is to generate an internal command for VDP475). More specifically, the MPU 472 executes a process of specifying the variation display pattern of each game time in the symbol display device 253 based on the command transmitted from the notification / effect control device 140, and also performs a process related to the hold notice described later. Is executed, and the drawing process for VDP475 is executed according to the processing result. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253.

The program ROM 473 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 472 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for a background image. The work RAM 474 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 472. These work data, flags, and the like are stored in each area of the work RAM 474.

The VDP475 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 253. Since the VDP475 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 475 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 472, the video RAM 477, etc. to intervene in reading and writing the data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 477 from the character ROM 476 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 253.

The character ROM 476 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 253. The character ROM 476 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 476 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 476. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 473 is stored in the character ROM 476.

The video RAM 477 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 253, and the display content of the symbol display device 253 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 477.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the outline of the variation display mode of the symbol on the display screen 253a is specified by the notification / effect control device 140 with reference to the command from the main control device 162, and based on the specific result. The details of the variable display mode are determined by the display control device 410. Specifically, in the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140, the variation display control process is executed as a part of the periodic process started in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), and the variation display of the symbol is displayed by this variation display control process. The outline of the aspect and the like are specified. Here, the variation display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Variable display control processing)
In the variation display control process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the game is being played, that is, whether or not the symbol display device 253 is executing the variation display or the definite display of the symbol for one game. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined whether or not the variation start command transmitted from the main control device 162 is received.

If a negative determination is made in step S1102, the variation display control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, the variation display control process ends after the variation start process described later is executed in step S1103.

Returning to the description of step S1101, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation end command transmitted from the main control device 162 is received. If a negative determination is made in step S1104, the variable display control process is terminated after the variable intermediate processing is executed in step S1105. The variable middle processing is a process for executing various effects and changing the determined effects in the game times started by the variable start process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, the process proceeds to step S1106, the variation end process is executed in step S1106, and then the variation display control process ends. In the variation end processing, the variation display of the symbol and the effect being executed are terminated (fixed and stopped) so as to correspond to the hold information related to the game times. In such a process, the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 are driven and controlled to produce an effect corresponding to the fixed stop. Then, after outputting the confirmation command to the display control device 410, the process for ending the fluctuation is terminated. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the symbol display device 253 to confirm and stop the symbol based on the received confirmation command.

(Process for starting fluctuation)
Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31, the variation start processing in step S1103 will be supplementarily described. The variation start process is a process for starting the effect for game rounds based on the reception of the variation start command transmitted from the main control device 162. In the fluctuation start processing, the reach display and the like are set as the effect for the game round.

In the fluctuation start processing, first, the fluctuation start command received this time in step S1201 is read, and the information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the information on the fluctuation display time are specified from the command. Further, as described above, when the fluctuation start command is transmitted from the main control device 162, the type command is also transmitted. In step S1101, the type command received together with the fluctuation start command received this time is read, and the game result information such as the probability variation jackpot result information, the normal jackpot result information, or the deviation result information is specified from the command. Then, in step S1201, from the above-specified information, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the type of jackpot if the jackpot has been won, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if the jackpot has not been won, and variable display time. Information is grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the register of MPU442.

In the following step S1202, based on the information grasped in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game times started this time is the game result corresponding to the jackpot result. In the case of a jackpot result, that is, a probabilistic jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, the effect setting process for the jackpot is executed in the following step S1203.

In the effect setting process for the jackpot, the stop result of the symbol for the jackpot is determined (the stop result determination process is performed). In the stop result determination process, when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained, the stop result in which the same combination of specific symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is obtained in this game. Determined as a stop result. Further, in the case of a normal jackpot result, a stop result in which the same combination of non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is used as the stop result of this game. decide.

The type of main symbol and the effective lines L1 to L5 that are stopped and displayed when a big hit result is obtained are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined by the above process is the final stop provided in the RAM 444. It is stored as address information in the line address storage area. At this time, the process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed. In the following description, the address information of the stop result determined by the various stop result determination processes is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 444.

Further, in the effect setting process for the jackpot, the variable display mode of the symbol for the jackpot is determined (the variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, when a big hit result is obtained, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variation display mode determination process for reach display, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the game in the variation display time and type command of the variation start command received this time. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed. Also in the variable display mode determination process shown below, the corresponding variable display pattern table is acquired from the variable display pattern table storage area of ROM 443, and the effect pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result is determined. Then, the address information of the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444.

If it is determined in step S1202 that the result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is grasped whether or not reach occurs in this game round. When reach occurs, the process proceeds to step S1205, and the effect setting process for generating reach is executed. In the effect setting process for generating reach, the outline of the effect and the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped are determined. Since the former is the same as the process of step S1203, the description is incorporated. Since this process corresponds to the out-of-reach, the stop symbol is determined so that the symbol combination does not correspond to the jackpot result. That is, the stop result in which the combination of the off-reach symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this time. In this case, the type of combination of the out-of-reach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in this determination, the same symbol combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the same as the symbol forming the reach line, is set with respect to the reach line. The stop result on the effective line is determined so that the final stop is made at the stop position shifted before or after. After that, the process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed.

If it is determined in step S1204 that no reach has occurred, the process proceeds to step S1206. In step S1206, the outline of the effect for complete removal and the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped are determined. Since this process corresponds to complete deviation, the stop symbol is determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not formed.

After executing any of the processes of step S1203, step S1205, and step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, a process of outputting a command including information on the stop result and the effect pattern determined in steps S1203, S1205, and S1206 to the display control device 410 as a stop result command and a pattern command is executed. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 253 in order to execute the effect in the current game round based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

After executing the process of step S1207, in the following step S1208, after executing the process of starting the effect for the game round, the process for starting the variation is ended. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started based on the effect patterns determined in steps S1203, S1205, and S1206, and the effect for game rounds is started.

Here, a variation display mode of the symbol displayed on the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) will be supplementarily described based on FIG. 32. FIG. 32 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the types of variable display modes, and FIG. 32 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of each variable display mode.

(Variable display mode)
As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the variation display mode of the symbol executed on the display screen 253a is completely off, and there are five major modes: normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. Separated. Each of these variable display modes is set so that the variable display time is different, and the outline of the variable display mode for each game is grasped based on the information related to the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162. It is possible.

Specifically, the fluctuation display time of complete deviation is "3 sec to 8 sec" (the difference is set according to the number of holds), the fluctuation display time of normal reach A is "10 sec", and the fluctuation display time of normal reach B is. Is longer than the variable display time of normal reach A, "15 sec", the variable display time of super reach A is longer than the variable display time of normal reach A and B, "16 sec", and the variable display time of super reach B is super reach. The variable display time of A is longer than "17 sec", and the variable display time of Super Reach C is "18 sec", which is longer than the variable display time of other Super Reach A and B. For example, when the information regarding the fluctuation display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is "15 sec", it is understood that the normal reach B should be executed by the notification / effect control device 140. ..

In addition, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, it is easier to select in the order of Super Reach C> Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach B> Normal Reach A. It is easy to select in the order of Off> Normal Reach A> Normal Reach B> Super Reach A> Super Reach B> Super Reach C. In other words, the higher the variable display time, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot.

Here, the variation display mode of the normal reach A and B will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (b1). When normal reach A and B are selected, first, the variable display (scroll display) of all the stopped display symbols is started, and then the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row (upper symbol row Z1) is started. Is finished (stop display), and the variation display of the symbol is finished (stop display) in the lower symbol row (lower symbol row Z3). In this way, in the state where the upper and lower symbol columns Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbols with the same numbers attached to any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 13A) are stopped and displayed. A reach line is formed at. Then, in the situation where the reach line is formed, the variation display of the middle symbol row (middle symbol row Z2) is performed, so that the reach display (reach variation display) is obtained. After the reach display is displayed, the variable display ends by stopping and displaying the middle symbol column Z2. Then, when the same symbol as the symbol constituting the reach display stops on the reach line, it is notified that the jackpot has been won, and when the other symbols stop on the reach line, the jackpot is won. You will be notified that you have not done so. In this way, the combination of the symbols displayed as the final stop is maintained as it is for a predetermined period. That is, the current game round continues until the stop display period elapses, and the transition to the next game round is allowed after the stop display period elapses.

In the present embodiment, the difference in the variable display time between the normal reach A and the normal reach B is secured by setting the difference in the variable display time of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach line is formed. How to set the difference between is arbitrary. For example, it is possible to secure the difference in the fluctuation display time by setting the difference in the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the formation of the reach line.

Next, the variable display modes of the super reach A, B, and C will be described based on the variable display modes of the normal reach A and B described above. As shown in FIGS. 32 (b2) to 32 (b4), the super reach A, B, and C form the above-mentioned reach line through the same process as the normal reach A and B. Then, after forming the reach line, the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character as a moving image in addition to the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, in Super Reach A, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a fairy is displayed in the center of the variable display area (center of the variable display area ME) of the middle symbol sequence Z2, and in Super Reach B. After the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), and in Super Reach C, after the reach line is formed, A character imitating a girl is displayed in the center of the variable display area (center of the variable display area ME) of the middle symbol sequence Z2.

(Monitoring device 600)
The pachinko machine 10 shown in the present embodiment is provided with a monitoring device 600 that monitors the movement of the main control device 162. As shown in FIG. 33, the main control device 162, the payout control device 242, and the notification / effect control device 140 are connected to the input port of the monitoring device 600. As described above, the main control device 162 is connected to the upper operating port 83a, the lower operating port 83b, the general winning port 81, and various winning detection sensors 391a to 391d for the variable winning device 82 (large winning opening). When the main control device 162 confirms that the upper operating port 83a, the lower operating port 83b, the general winning port 81, and the variable winning device 82 (large winning opening) have won a prize, the main control device 162 indicates that fact. The prize ball command is output to the monitoring device 600 as information (signal).

The MPU 602 of the monitoring device 600 is provided with a storage unit 604 for storing the information input from the main control device 162. The storage unit 604 is mainly composed of a first storage area 605 that stores game information such as the number of winnings and the number of big hits, and a second storage area 606 that mainly stores the number of occurrences of abnormalities and the like in the gaming machine.

For example, when a prize ball command indicating a prize is received from the main control device 162, the various prize counters 621 to 624 arranged in the first storage area 605 that correspond to the received signal are updated (added). .. That is, the monitoring device 600 monitors the number of winnings in the operating ports 83a and 83b, the general winning opening 81, and the variable winning device 82 (large winning opening).

Further, when the game round is executed by the main control device 162, the confirmation information (signal) is output from the main control device 162 to the monitoring device 600 at the timing of the confirmation display (end timing of the fluctuation display) described above. Will be done. When this signal is received, the monitoring device 600 updates (adds) the game count counter 625 arranged in the first storage area 605. That is, the number of games is monitored by the monitoring device 600.

Further, when the jackpot result is obtained in the game round and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the jackpot information (signal) is output from the main control device 162 to the monitoring device 600 at the start timing of the open / close execution mode. When the monitoring device 600 receives this signal, the hit count counter 626 arranged in the first storage area 605 is updated (added). That is, the number of hits is monitored by the monitoring device 600.

When the game ball is paid out, a payout command is output from the payout control device 242 to the monitoring device 600 as a signal to that effect. When this signal is received, the monitoring device 600 updates (adds) the prize ball number counter 627 arranged in the first storage area 605. That is, the number of prize balls (the number of game balls paid out) is monitored by the monitoring device 600.

Various information stored in the first storage area 605 and the second storage area 606 are stored in a state associated with the set value. For example, when a prize is generated in the operating ports 83a and 83b in the setting 1 and the prize information is stored, the prize information is stored with the information indicating the setting 1 at the time of the prize being added added. Become. As a result, when the winning status and the like are confirmed after the fact, it is possible to identify at which set value each winning is generated.

A notification / effect control device 140 is connected to the output port of the monitoring device 600, and the notification / effect control device 140 can appropriately acquire information stored in the monitoring device 600. Further, the notification / effect control device 140 has a function of displaying the information stored in the monitoring device 600 on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 based on a predetermined request operation by the hall manager or the like. ..

(Setting change function)
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 shown in the present embodiment, the set values are provided in a plurality of stages, and the jackpot occurrence probability can be changed by changing the set values (setting change). .. The set value is not always changeable, and permission / prohibition is switched depending on the situation. In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the switching of permission / prohibition of setting change is characteristic. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the setting change will be supplementarily described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 34.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the pachinko machine 10, the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 110 is guided to the game area PE by the guide rail 100. The game ball that has flowed down the game area PE is discharged from the game area PE through various entry portions such as the general winning opening 81 or the out opening 89, and is discharged from the game area PE through a collection passage provided on the back surface of the game area forming body 80a. Returned to the facility. Further, among the game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 110, those that could not reach the game area PE are the player through the guide passage 103 → the foul passage formed in the front door frame 14 (passage forming unit 45). Will be returned to.

As shown in FIG. 34, the main control device 162 includes a launch detection sensor 701 provided in the game ball launch mechanism 110, a foul detection sensor 702 provided in the foul ball passage of the passage forming unit 45, and a game. A recovery detection sensor 703 provided in the recovery passage on the back side of the board unit 80 is connected.

The launch detection sensor 701 detects the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and the main control device 162 specifies that the game ball has been launched based on the information (detection signal) from the launch detection sensor 701. It is possible. The foul detection sensor 702 detects a game ball passing through the foul ball passage, and in the main control device 162, the game ball passes through the foul ball passage based on the information (detection signal) from the foul detection sensor 702. It is possible to identify that. The recovery detection sensor 703 detects a game ball passing through the recovery passage, and the main control device 162 indicates that the game ball has passed through the recovery passage based on the information (detection signal) from the recovery detection sensor 703. It can be identified. In the main control device 162, it is possible to specify whether or not the game ball remains in the game area PE based on the information from each of the detection sensors 701 to 703.

Further, when the game ball is paid out by the payout control device 242, information (payout command) indicating that the payout is executed is output to the main control device 162, and the main control device 162 is configured. Then, based on the prize ball command transmitted to the payout control device 242 and the payout information acquired from the payout control device 242, it is possible to specify whether or not the payout of the game ball is completed.

An opening detection sensor 706 that detects the opening of the inner frame 13 is connected to the pachinko machine 10, and is the inner frame 13 opened based on the information (detection signal) from the opening detection sensor 706 in the main control device 162? It is possible to specify whether or not it is.

Here, the setting change process (step S507) executed as a part of the normal process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35.

(Process for changing settings)
In the setting change process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If a negative determination is made in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1302. In step S1302, it is determined whether or not the setting change key is inserted into the key hole 167 and switched to the ON state. If a negative determination is made in step S1302, the process for changing this setting is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1303. In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the game ball remains in the game area PE based on the information from the detection sensors 701 to 703. If a negative determination is made in step S1302, the process for changing this setting is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball waiting to be paid out based on the payout information from the payout control device 242. If a negative determination is made in step S1304, the process for changing this setting is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1304, the process proceeds to step S1305. In step S1305, it is determined whether or not the timing has elapsed a predetermined waiting time after the payout is completed.

The game ball paid out from the payout device 224 passes through the payout passage and heads for the upper plate 33 or the lower plate 34. At this time, it takes a certain amount of time (about 2 sec in the present embodiment) for the game ball to reach the player's hand. The waiting time is a time determined so as to be slightly longer than this required time, and in step S1305, it is estimated whether or not the paid-out game ball has reached the player's hand.

If a negative determination is made in step S1305, the process for changing this setting is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, the process proceeds to step S1306. In step S1306, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress. That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display or the final display of the pattern is being executed on the operation port display unit. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1306, the process for changing this setting is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S1306, the process proceeds to step S1307.

In step S1307, it is determined whether or not the hold information is stored, that is, whether or not the next game is reserved. If a negative determination is made in step S1307, that is, if the next game round is on the way, the process for changing this setting is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1307, the process proceeds to step S1308.

In step S1308, it is determined whether or not the inner frame 13 is open based on the detection information from the open detection sensor 706. If a negative determination is made in step S1308, the process for changing this setting is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1308, the process proceeds to step S1309.

In step S1309, the setting change mode start process is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, (1) there are no game balls remaining in the game area PE, (2) there are no game balls waiting to be paid out, and (3) the waiting time after the end of payout has elapsed. (4) The game is not in progress, (5) Subsequent hold information does not exist, (6) Inner frame 13 is open, (7) Setting change key is ON. The configuration is such that setting changes are permitted on condition that

In the setting change mode start process, the currently selected setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 168, and acceptance of the setting change operation is permitted. Then, various processes related to the game progress (for example, game turn control process, game state transition process, electric service support process, game ball launch control process, etc. in normal process) are prohibited, and various flag storage areas 435 of RAM 404 are set. Stores the setting change mode flag. By storing the setting change mode flag, affirmative determination is made in step S1301 thereafter. By deleting the setting change mode flag, various processes related to the game progress are restarted.

Returning to the description of step S1301, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, that is, if the setting change mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1310. In step S1310, it is determined whether or not the operation of the setting change switch 166 (setting change operation) has been performed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1310, the process proceeds to step S1311 to execute the change operation corresponding process. Specifically, the setting value newly selected by the setting change operation is stored, and the display content is updated so that the stored setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 168.

If a negative determination is made in step S1310, that is, if the setting change operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S1312. In step S1312, it is determined whether or not the setting change key has been switched so as to be in the OFF state. If a negative determination is made in step S1312, the process for changing this setting is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1312, the process proceeds to step S1313. In step S1313, the setting change process is executed. Specifically, the flags corresponding to the set values selected at the time when the setting change key is switched to the OFF state are stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, when setting 1 is selected, the setting 1 correspondence flag is stored, when setting 2 is selected, the setting 2 correspondence flag is stored, and when setting 3 is selected. Stores the setting 3 correspondence flag. In the subsequent processing, for example, when the setting 1 corresponding flag is stored, the winning / failing lottery table corresponding to setting 1 is referred to, and when the setting 2 corresponding flag is stored, the winning / failing lottery table corresponding to setting 2 is referred to. When the setting 3 correspondence flag is stored, the winning / failing lottery table corresponding to the setting 3 is referred to.

After executing the setting change mode termination process in the following step S1314, the setting change processing is terminated. In the setting change mode end processing, the setting change mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 is erased, the display of the setting value display unit 168 described above is terminated, and the prohibited various processing is resumed. Let me.

Here, the flow up to the setting change will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the winning detection sensor 391a for the general winning opening detects the winning of the general winning opening 81 at the timing of ta1, the game ball is moved at the timing of ta2 thereafter. The payout is executed. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of the general winning opening 81 is 10, and it takes a certain amount of time to complete the payout. The execution conditions (2) and (3) for changing the settings are satisfied at the timing of ta4 when the waiting time has elapsed from the timing of ta3 when the payout of the prize balls is completed. At the same time, when the other execution conditions (1), (4) to (7) are satisfied, the setting change is permitted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 shown in the present embodiment, the payout control device 242 transmits the payout information of the game ball to the monitoring device 600, and the payout information is accumulated. Then, it is monitored whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally based on the payout information. In the case of such monitoring, it is important which set value the game ball is paid out under the condition. For example, when the set value is changed at the timing of taX between ta1 and ta2, the winning information transmitted from the main control device 162 to the monitoring device 600 corresponds to the set value and the payout control device 242 monitors. The payout information transmitted to the device 600 deviates from the corresponding set value. Such deviations can hinder the improvement of monitoring accuracy. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the setting change is prohibited at least until the payout is completed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid the above-mentioned deviation of information and contribute to the enhancement of the monitoring function.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36B, the relationship between the presence / absence of pending information and the setting change will be described.

Based on the fact that the winning detection sensors 391b to 391c for the operating port detect the winning of the operating ports 83a and 83b at the timing of tb1, the variable display of the pattern on the display unit for the operating port and the symbol on the symbol display device 253 The variable display is started. At this time, since the number of subsequent pending information is 0, a relatively long variable display time is set. When a prize is generated in the operating ports 83a and 83b at each timing of tb2 and tb3 during the variable display, the hold information acquired based on the prize is retained as it is stored, and the running game round ends. It will be in a state of waiting until. After the end of this game round, the game rounds corresponding to the subsequent hold information are executed in order at the timing of tb4 and tb5, and the execution condition of the setting change is executed at the timing of tb7 where all the hold information is digested. 4) and (5) are satisfied. At the same time, when the other execution conditions (1) to (3) and (6) to (7) are satisfied, the setting change is permitted.

In the present embodiment, although the game progress is facilitated by the hold function, the timing of winning and the timing of the lottery are different in such a configuration. Therefore, if the setting is changed between the acquisition timing of the pending information and the start timing (lottery timing) of the game round (see, for example, the timing of tbX) in the situation where the subsequent pending information is reserved. There is a concern that a game round that should normally result in a jackpot will result in a missed result, or a game round that would otherwise result in a jackpot result will result in a jackpot. This is not preferable because it causes a factor that lowers the reliability of the behavior of the gaming machine. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the occurrence of such inconvenience is suppressed by the configuration in which the setting change is prohibited not only during the game round but also when the subsequent hold information is reserved.

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

If the information about the game is suddenly deleted during the game, it is assumed that the behavior of the game machine suddenly changes. For example, if a game ball that would otherwise be paid out to a player is no longer paid out, or if the game times related to the acquired special information are not executed, the player is confused and the game machine. It is feared that it will be a factor that reduces the reliability of the pachinko machine. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the change of the set value (setting change) is restricted when the situation is not suitable for the setting change, so that the behavior of the gaming machine is suppressed from changing during the game. can. This can contribute to the improvement of reliability of the gaming machine.

Specifically, the setting change is regulated in the situation where the game ball remains in the game area PE. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game ball that should have been launched under a certain set value from winning a prize in a ball entry portion such as a general winning opening 81 under a different set value. In particular, since the remaining spheres are monitored using the detection sensor, the regulation is released promptly after the remaining spheres are discharged, so that no wasted waiting time is generated. This is advantageous in improving the convenience of the gaming machine when changing the settings.

If a payout request is made due to the occurrence of a prize, there will be a certain time lag between entering the ball and paying out. If the set value is changed during this period, it becomes unclear which set value the current payout corresponds to. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by continuing the change regulation until the waiting time elapses even after the payout operation is completed.

In a gaming machine, it may be difficult to immediately pay out the gaming balls due to factors such as a shortage of gaming balls. In such a situation, the payout operation may be temporarily interrupted, but the payout operation is restarted when the payout becomes possible. In such a case, by restricting the change of the set value at least until the payout is completed, it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to know which set value the paid out game ball corresponds to.

If the pending information is stored, the setting change will be restricted. As a result, for example, regarding special information that normally corresponds to predetermined judgment information (for example, winning information), a judgment result that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information may be obtained, or special information that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information may be obtained. It is possible to preferably suppress that the determination result corresponds to the predetermined determination information.

It is necessary to open the inner frame 13 which is a door body in order to satisfy the execution condition of the setting change. Since such an act is conspicuous, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally changing the set value and contribute to the improvement of the crime prevention function of the gaming machine.

In the configuration in which the winning prize or the like is monitored by the monitoring device 600, a slight time lag may occur from the confirmation that the winning prize has occurred to the transmission of the information to the monitoring device 600. If the settings are changed in such a time gap, the information may be inconsistent. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the configuration is such that the setting change is regulated while the game is in progress, such inconsistency of information can be suitably suppressed.

The content is not limited to the description of the first embodiment described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the first embodiment, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to the first embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification example 1>
In the first embodiment, the presence or absence of a remaining ball in the game area PE is specified based on each information from the launch detection sensor 701, the foul detection sensor 702, and the recovery detection sensor 703, and the game is played in the game area PE. The configuration is such that the setting change is avoided when the ball remains, but in order to avoid the setting change when the game ball remains in the game area PE. , The following configuration is also possible. That is, the waiting time is set based on the time required from the launch of the game ball to the discharge from the game area PE, and the setting change is prohibited from the end of the launch of the game ball until the waiting time elapses. It is also possible to configure the configuration in which the above execution condition (1) is satisfied based on the elapse of the waiting time. Further, considering that the launch of the game ball is executed based on the launch operation of the player, the execution condition (1) is satisfied when the waiting time elapses from the end of the launch operation of the game ball. It is also possible to do. As shown in these modified examples, in the configuration in which the remaining spheres are considered to be absent due to the passage of the standby time, the additional configuration of the sensor and the like can be reduced as much as possible, so that the structure of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified. Is advantageous.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment described above, it is determined whether or not the payout of the game ball is withheld later based on the information from the payout control device 242, and the setting change is permitted on condition that the payout of the game ball is not withheld. However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, if the actual time from the occurrence of winning to the completion of payout of the game ball is determined to some extent, the waiting time is set based on this time, and the winning ball corresponding to the general winning opening 81 or the like is set. When a prize is awarded for a part, it may be set as one of the execution conditions related to the setting change that the waiting time has elapsed from the prize.

<Modification example 3>
The configuration may be such that it is specified whether or not the payout device 224 is in operation, and the fact that the payout device 224 is not in operation is added to one of the above execution conditions.

<Modification example 4>
The configuration may be such that the occurrence of an abnormality is monitored by using the information stored in the monitoring device 600, and when an abnormality occurs, the setting change is prohibited. Further, in the configuration for notifying when an abnormality occurs, it is also possible to set that the abnormality notification is canceled as one of the execution conditions related to the setting change.

<Modification 5>
When the setting is changed, various game information such as hold information and payout information stored in the RAM 404 can be erased in the same manner as when the RAM erase switch is operated. .. Even with such a configuration, since the setting change is regulated in the situation where the game is being performed, it is preferably suppressed that the privilege etc. that should be originally obtained by the setting change during the game is lost. can.

<Modification 6>
Before the winning / failing lottery or the sorting lottery is performed (that is, before the corresponding game round is started) in the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, the content of the hold information is first specified, and the destination is specified. It is also possible to configure the advance notice effect (for example, the hold advance notice effect) corresponding to the result of the above to be executed before the corresponding game times (for example, the game times executed in advance). In the configuration that suggests the lottery result in the corresponding game time by the advance notice effect, the advance notice effect that should have corresponded to the jackpot result may be cut off in the middle by executing the setting change in the middle. It is assumed that the game result of is inconsistent with the content of the notice production. In this regard, when the hold information is stored, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by configuring the configuration so that the setting change is restricted.

<Second Embodiment>
One of the features of this embodiment is that the security function of the gaming machine is improved by coordinating the main control device 162 and the payout control device 242. Hereinafter, the configuration according to this device will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. The description of various configurations common to the first embodiment will be omitted.

In the main control device 162, information indicating the selected set value is transmitted to the payout control device 242 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when the pachinko machine 10 is started) and when the setting is changed. The payout control device 242 can specify the selected set value based on this information. First, with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38 (a), the process related to the transmission of the set value executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described. FIG. 37 (a) is a flowchart showing an initial command output process (S110) executed as a part of the main process (see FIG. 19), and FIG. 37 (b) is a setting executed as a part of the normal process (see FIG. 23). A flowchart showing the change process (S1313), FIG. 38 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the initial command.

(Initial command output processing)
As shown in FIG. 37 (a), in the initial command output process, first, the current set value is confirmed in step S1401. That is, the set value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is confirmed. In the following step S1402, the code (identification information of the set value) to be assigned to the initial command to be output to the payout control device 242 is determined.

The ROM 403 of the main control device 162 stores the following information as a set value identification information group. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38 (a), four codes "BAAA", "ABAA", "AABA", and "AAAB" are provided as codes corresponding to the setting 1, and correspond to the setting 2. There are four codes, "BBAA", "BABA", "BAAB", and "ABAB", and the codes corresponding to setting 3 are "BBBA", "BBAB", "BABB", and "ABBB". Four codes are provided. In the process of step S1402, any one code is randomly determined from the plurality of codes corresponding to the current set value.

In step S1403, the code determined in step S1402 is stored in the code storage area of the RAM 404. After that, the code will be referred to in the prize ball command setting process described later until the setting is changed. In the following step S1404, the initial command is output to the control device on the sub side such as the payout control device 242, and the initial command output process is terminated.

The code set in the initial command output process will be reset when the setting is changed. Here, the setting change process will be described with reference to FIG. 37 (b).

(Setting change processing)
In the setting change process, first, the setting selected by the setting change operation this time is specified in step S1501. In the following step S1502, the reference table switching process is performed. As a result, access to other lottery tables that do not correspond to the set value this time is prohibited. In the following step S1503, the code (identification information of the set value) is determined. Since the details of the code determination are the same as those in step S1402, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the following step S1504, the code determined in step S1503 is stored (overwritten) in the code storage area of the RAM 404. After that, the setting change command is set in step S1505, and the setting change process is completed. The setting change command set in step S1505 is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in the external output process (step S501) of the normal process.

When the MPU of the payout control device 242 receives the initial command and the setting change command, the set value is specified from the code included in those commands and stored in the RAM of the payout control device 242.

Next, the prize ball command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (b). The prize ball command setting process is a process executed to instruct the payout control device 242 to pay out the prize balls in each of the winning processes of steps S205 to S207.

(Prize ball command setting process)
In the prize ball command setting process, first, the prize destination is specified in step S1601. Next, in step S1602, the code stored in the code storage area of the RAM 404 is read. Then, in the following step S1603, the prize ball command is generated so as to include the read code. The prize ball command generated in this way includes information indicating the number of prize balls, information indicating the winning destination, and various information of the code (see FIG. 38 (c)), and is an external output process of normal processing (step S501). Is transmitted to the payout control device 242.

Here, with reference to FIG. 39 (a), a command correspondence process executed as a part of the periodic process in the MPU of the payout control device 242 will be described.

(Command correspondence processing)
In the command correspondence process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is an initial command or a setting change command. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, the set value is specified from the code included in those commands and stored in the set value storage area provided in the RAM of the payout control device 242. Similar to the main control device 162, the ROM of the payout control device 242 stores in advance a conversion table (see the schematic diagram of FIG. 38) showing the relationship between the code and the set value, and refer to this conversion table. The set value is specified.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a prize ball command. If a negative determination is made in step S1703, the process corresponding to this command is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1704.

In step S1704, the conversion table is referred to, and a process of specifying → storing the set value from the code included in the prize ball command received this time is performed.

In the following step S1705, it is confirmed whether or not the set value specified in step S1704 matches the set value stored in the code storage area of the RAM. If a negative determination is made in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1709. In step S1709, the values of the reservation counters provided in the various counter areas of the RAM are added according to the number of prize balls of the prize ball command received this time. The value of the reservation counter is cleared to 0 by executing conversion to the payout counter, which will be described later.

In the process of step S1705 described above, the set values basically match. On the other hand, if the set values do not match, there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in either the main control device 162 or the payout control device 242. In such a case, the prize ball is not paid out immediately, but the prize ball is reserved (delayed) at least until the above abnormality is resolved.

After executing the abnormality notification process in the following step S1710, the command corresponding process ends. In the abnormality notification process, an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140. Based on the reception of this abnormality notification command, the notification / effect control device 140 executes abnormality notification on the display screen 253a or the like of the symbol display device 253.

Returning to the description of step S1705, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1705, that is, if the set values match, the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, a process of adding the values of the payout counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM according to the number of prize balls of the prize ball command received this time is performed. The value of the payout counter is subtracted each time the prize balls are paid out, and when the value of the payout counter becomes 0, the number of prize balls waiting to be paid out becomes 0.

After executing the process of step S1706, the process proceeds to step S1707. In step S1707, the values of the reservation counters provided in the various counter areas of the RAM are referred to, and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball for which the payout is reserved. If a negative determination is made in step S1707, the processing corresponding to this command is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1707, the process proceeds to step S1708, and the value of the reservation counter is added as the value of the payout counter. As a result, the prize balls for which the payout has been reserved will also be paid out.

According to the second embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The prize ball command (corresponding to "payout command information") output from the main control device 162 includes information corresponding to the set value. In the payout control device 242, the set value set in the main control device 162 can be specified from the prize ball command. In this way, by sharing the set value between the main control device 162 and the payout control device 242, the cooperation between the two control devices 162 and 242 can be strengthened. Since the prize ball command is information that is output to the payout control device 242 with a certain degree of frequency as the game progresses, it is possible to confirm the set value by adding information indicating the set value to such an existing command. Opportunities can be increased. This is a preferable configuration for improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

When the setting is changed, the information of the set value determined by the main control device 162 is input to the payout control device 242, and the payout control device 242 stores the information of the set value. After that, when the prize ball command is received from the main control device 162, it is determined whether or not the set value specified from the prize ball command and the set value stored at the time of changing the setting match. This makes it possible to detect even if an illegal act such as replacing the main control device 162 with an illegal one is performed.

If the set value stored in advance and the set value specified this time do not match, the payout of the game ball will be avoided as an abnormality occurs. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally acquire a game ball and strengthen the crime prevention function of the game machine.

In a configuration in which whether or not to pay out the game ball is determined based on the comparison result of the set value, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act such as clearing the set value information is performed. When the set value information is cleared in this way, the crime prevention function can be strengthened by configuring the configuration in which the payout of the game ball is restricted even if the winning command is input.

There is a certain time lag between the time when the prize ball command is input to the payout control device 242 and the time when the payout is actually performed. Such a time lag becomes large when the payout of the game balls is not catching up, such as when the prize ball commands are continuously input. Here, if it is confirmed that an abnormality has occurred based on the set value, the payout will be continued for those for which the payout has already been decided, while the new prize ball command determined to be abnormal will be issued. Withdrawal is regulated. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of inconveniences such as the player not being able to receive even the payout that the player should have originally obtained due to the enhancement of the crime prevention function and the like.

If the set values do not match, the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command is reserved, and the reservation is canceled by confirming that the set values match in the subsequent prize ball command. It will be. For example, since it cannot be denied that the above abnormality may occur accidentally due to the mixing of noise or the like, if it is confirmed by the subsequent prize ball command that there is no abnormality as described above, the withdrawal during reservation is performed. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the player from suffering a disadvantage due to the enhancement of the crime prevention function and the like.

The content is not limited to the description of the second embodiment described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the second embodiment, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to the second embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification example 1>
In the second embodiment described above, the identification information of the set value included in the initial command, the setting change command, and the prize ball command is encrypted. It suffices if at least the main control device 162 and the payout control device 242 share the set value so that it can be confirmed whether the set value is different each time a prize ball command is received. It is not always necessary to encrypt the identification information of.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment described above, the prize ball command is configured to include the identification information of the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient if the main control device 162 and the payout control device 242 can appropriately collate the set values, and a confirmation command including the identification information of the set values is issued from the main control device 162 separately from the prize ball command. It may be configured to transmit to 242. For example, the above confirmation command may be periodically transmitted, or if the game has not been performed for a certain period of time (non-operating state), the game is restarted at the timing when the game is restarted. It may be configured to send the above confirmation command.

However, when a confirmation command different from the prize ball command is provided as a command transmitted from the main control device 162 to the payout control device 242, it is not preferable that the output timings of both commands overlap. When both the prize ball command and the confirmation command are transmitted to the payout control device 242, it is preferable that the former is prioritized over the latter. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suppress a decrease in the responsiveness of payout of prize balls even when the commands used are diversified.

<Modification example 3>
In the second embodiment described above, the prize ball command includes the identification information of the set value for all the winning balls of the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating ports 83a and 83b, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that is done. If the difference is provided so that the bias of the ball entry frequency becomes smaller in the order of variable winning device 82> general winning opening 81> lower operating port 83b> upper operating port 83a, at least the bias of the ball entering frequency is the largest. It suffices that the identification information of the set value is given to the prize ball command for the small ball entry portion. Further, in view of the fact that the bias of the ball entry frequency becomes large for the variable ball entry section, the prize ball command may be provided with the identification information of the set value for the non-variable ball entry section.

<Modification example 4>
In the second embodiment described above, the set values are compared, but instead of or in addition to this, the codes may be directly compared.

<Third embodiment>
In the second embodiment, the crime prevention function is improved by strengthening the cooperation between the main control device 162 and the payout control device 242, but in the present embodiment, the main control device 162 and the payout control device One of the features is that the crime prevention function is further improved by strengthening the cooperation among the three parties, which is the addition of the monitoring device 600 to the 242. In this embodiment, since the main configuration is the same as that of the second embodiment, the configuration related to the above cooperation will be mainly described, and the description of the configuration common to the second embodiment will be omitted. do.

As described above, the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 162 to the payout control device 242 includes the above code which is the identification information of the set value. This code is diverted to the payout command transmitted from the payout control device 242 to the monitoring device 600. That is, the information transmitted from the payout control device 242 to the monitoring device 600 also includes the code which is the identification information of the set value.

Similar to the main control device 162 and the payout control device 242, the monitoring device 600 stores in advance a conversion table (see the schematic diagram of FIG. 38) showing the relationship between the code and the set value, and refers to this conversion table. The set value is specified. Further, in the second storage area 606 of the monitoring device 600, the set value storage area corresponding to the main control device that stores the set value specified from the code acquired from the main control device 162 and the code acquired from the payout control device 242 are used. A set value storage area corresponding to the payout control device for storing the specified set value is provided. In the monitoring device 600, it is possible to identify whether the main control device 162 and the payout control device 242 are normally linked by comparing the set values stored in the set value storage area. Hereinafter, the set value comparison process executed by the monitoring device 600 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39 (b). The set value comparison process is a process that is periodically executed by the control unit of the monitoring device 600.

In the set value comparison process, first, in step S1721, it is determined whether or not the prize ball command from the main control device 162 or the payout command from the payout control device 242 is received. If a negative determination is made in step S1721, the present set value comparison process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1721, the process proceeds to step S1722. In step S1722, a code is read from the command received this time, and the set value specified from the code is overwritten (updated) with the corresponding one of the above set value storage areas.

After that, in step S1723, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a payout command from the payout control device 242. If a negative determination is made in step S1723, the present set value comparison process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1723, the process proceeds to step S1724. In step S1724, the set value stored in the set value storage area corresponding to the main control device is compared with the set value stored in the set value storage area corresponding to the payout control device. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1724, that is, if both set values match, the present set value comparison process ends as it is. When both the main control device 162 and the payout control device 242 are operating normally, a positive determination is basically made in step S1724.

If a negative determination is made in step S1724, that is, if the received command does not include a code, or if the set value is different even if the code is included, the process proceeds to step S1725. For example, when the set values do not match due to the payout control device 242 being replaced with an invalid one, a negative determination is made in step S1724.

In step S1725, the process for generating an abnormality is executed. Specifically, the occurrence of an abnormality is stored in the second storage area 606, and an abnormality notification command is output to the notification / effect control device 140. The notification / effect control device 140 drives the speaker unit 29 and the error display lamp unit 27 of the front door frame 14 based on the command to execute abnormality notification.

In a gaming machine having a setting change function, the set value may be changed illegally for the purpose of illegally acquiring benefits. At this time, it cannot be denied that the fact of fraud may be concealed by falsifying the information input to the monitoring device 600. Here, as shown in the present embodiment, the information indicating the set value is not only directly input from the main control device 162 to the monitoring device 600, but also input to the monitoring device 600 via the payout control device 242. Will be done. By comparing this information with the monitoring device 600, it is possible to detect whether or not the information has been tampered with. As a result, the crime prevention function of the gaming machine can be improved.

When comparing the information indicating the set value, if the timing is significantly deviated, there is a possibility that an erroneous determination will be made when the setting is changed normally. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, by inputting / outputting information indicating the set value according to a series of movements of winning a prize and paying out, the above timing deviation can be suppressed and the determination result can be confirmed. It is possible to preferably improve the peculiarity.

For example, when a prize is awarded to the general prize opening 81, the prize ball command related to the prize is immediately output to the payout control device 242, and the payout control device 242 receives the prize ball command based on the prize ball. Pay out. That is, the timing at which the payout command is input to the monitoring device 600 is later than the input timing of the prize ball command. As shown in the first embodiment, the set value cannot be changed in the situation where the payout of the game ball is refrained. Therefore, the prize ball command and the payout command input to the monitoring device 600 are used. Basically, the set values will match. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a difference in the set value from occurring even though the gaming machine is operating normally due to an interruption of the setting change operation or the like. This is a preferable configuration for improving the reliability of the monitoring function.

The content is not limited to the description of the third embodiment described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the third embodiment, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to the third embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification example 1>
In the third embodiment, the above comparison is performed when the payout command is received from the payout control device 242, but instead of or in addition to this, the prize ball command is received from the main control device 162. It is also possible to make the above-mentioned comparison in the case of the above. Even in such a configuration, since the payout command is configured to inherit the code included in the prize ball command from the main control device 162, it is possible to avoid that the abnormality determination is not performed well. Further, when the main control device 162 is illegally replaced, it becomes possible to specify this, which can contribute to further strengthening of the crime prevention function.

<Modification 2>
In the third embodiment, the payout command transmitted from the payout control device 242 to the monitoring device 600 is provided with the identification information (code) of the set value. However, the main control device 162, the monitoring device 600, and the payout are provided. In order to strengthen the cooperation of the three parties of the control device 242, it is sufficient that the monitoring device 600 can compare each information from the main control device 162 and the payout control device 242. For example, in addition to the payout command, the command transmitted from the payout control device 242 to the monitoring device 600 may be configured to add the identification information of the set value.

<Modification example 3>
In the third embodiment, the payout command generated by the payout control device 242 is configured to inherit the code of the prize ball command that triggered the payout command, but the payout command is not limited to this. .. It is also possible to assign the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM of the payout control device 242 to the payout command.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the winning information (monitoring information) stored in the monitoring device 600 is acquired by the notification / effect control device 140, and the abnormality notification is executed based on the acquired winning information. ing. At this time, one of the features is that the set value is taken into consideration when determining the occurrence of an abnormality. Hereinafter, various processes related to the abnormality notification (abnormality notification setting processing and abnormality detection processing) executed by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40A is a flowchart showing the abnormality notification setting process, and FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing the abnormality notification process.

(Abnormality notification setting process)
The abnormality notification setting process is a process executed as a part of the periodic process by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140. As shown in FIG. 40A, in the abnormality notification setting process, it is first determined in step S1801 whether an initial command or a setting change command has been received from the main control device 162. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, the abnormality notification setting process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1802.

In step S1802, it is determined whether or not the set value has been changed based on the information of the set value included in the initial command or the setting change command. If a negative determination is made in step S1802, that is, if the set value is not changed and is deferred, the abnormality notification setting process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, the process proceeds to step S1803.

In step S1803, the cumulative data (winning information) is deleted. In the present embodiment, information acquisition → storage from the monitoring device 600 is executed from the time when the set value is changed, and when the setting change is executed, the accumulated data stored up to that point is erased and newly executed. Information acquisition → Start memory.

In the following step S1804, the threshold value setting process used for the abnormality determination is executed. In the present embodiment, a threshold value is provided for each set value, and the threshold value corresponding to the current set value is used in the subsequent abnormality determination. The threshold value defines the number of winnings when a predetermined number of game balls are launched in consideration of design error, game situation, etc., and has a certain range. If the actual winning is generated so as to fall within this threshold, it is determined (estimated) that the gaming machine is operating normally, and if the actual winning is repeatedly out of the threshold, the gaming machine is assigned. Judge (estimate) that an abnormality has occurred.

The abnormality determination executed based on the winning information targets each of the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating openings 83a and 83b, but the outline thereof is the same. Therefore, in the following description, the outline of the abnormality determination will be described by taking the general winning opening 81 as an example, and the description of the outline of the abnormality determination relating to the other ball entry portions will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 41, the reason why the threshold values are individually set for each set value will be supplementarily described. FIG. 41 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the winning probability to the general winning opening 81 for each route, and FIG. 41 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the threshold value.

As shown in FIG. 6, for the game area PE, a left route that bypasses the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 from the left side and a right route that detours from the right side by the center frame 95 arranged in the center of the game area PE. It is roughly divided into. The upper operating port 83a is arranged on the left route, and in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball to the left route as compared with the right route. Progresses. That is, in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the game is advanced mainly by launching the game ball to the left route. On the other hand, on the right route, a lower operating port 83b with an electric accessory 91, a variable winning device 82, and a through gate 84 are arranged, and a normal gaming state and an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to a high frequency support mode are arranged. In the game, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball to the right route than to the left route. That is, in the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode and the open / close execution mode, the game is advanced mainly by firing the game ball to the right route.

Here, with respect to the three general winning openings 81a to 81c arranged on the left route, when the game ball is launched toward the left route, the winning probability is 1/300 each regardless of the gaming state. ing. That is, the winning probability when the three general winning openings 81a to 81c are combined is 1/100 (see FIG. 41 (a)). This probability is constant without being affected by the gaming state.

Regarding one general winning opening 81d arranged on the right route, the winning probability differs depending on the game state when the game ball is launched toward the right route.

Specifically, the general winning opening 81d is arranged at the most downstream portion of the right route, and the variable winning device 82 is arranged at a position upstream of the general winning opening 81d on the right route. Therefore, during the opening / closing execution mode, a part of the game ball heading for the general winning opening 81d flows into the variable winning device 82, and an event occurs in which winning the general winning opening 81d is avoided. Under these circumstances, the winning probability is 1/100 in the normal gaming state, whereas the winning probability is reduced to 1/500 in the open / close execution mode.

Therefore, in the normal game state, the winning probability is 1/100, which is the same when the general winning opening 81 is viewed as a whole, regardless of whether the game ball is launched toward either the right route or the left route. On the other hand, in the open / close execution mode, the case where the game ball is fired toward the right route and the case where the game ball is fired toward the left route are the cases where the general winning opening 81 is viewed as a whole. The winning probability will be different.

Then, as described above, in the settings 1 to 3, the probability of a jackpot result is differentiated so that the probability of a jackpot result increases in the order of setting 3 <setting 2 <setting 1. Due to the difference in the opportunity to shift to the open / close execution mode, the winning probability when viewed from the general winning opening 81 as a whole increases in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3. In view of such circumstances, a stepwise difference is provided between the threshold value corresponding to the setting 1, the threshold value corresponding to the setting 2, and the threshold value corresponding to the setting 3. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the threshold value corresponding to the setting 3 is the highest, the threshold value corresponding to the setting 2 is lower than the threshold value corresponding to the setting 3, and the threshold value corresponding to the setting 1 is. It is lower than the threshold value corresponding to setting 2. The upper limit of each threshold value is mainly set based on the winning probability when the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode continues, and the lower limit is mainly set with the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode and opening / closing execution. It is set based on the winning probability when the mode is repeated (so-called continuous chan).

The notification / effect control device 140 is configured to determine whether or not the winning probability is normal by referring to the threshold value selected based on the current set value. Here, an abnormality notification process executed by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (b).

(Abnormality notification processing)
In the abnormality notification process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the abnormality notification is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1902 to execute the information acquisition process. In the information acquisition process, information on the number of winnings from the monitoring device 600 to the general winning opening 81 and information on the number of shots of the game ball are acquired.

In the following step S1903, it is determined whether or not the determination condition for abnormality determination is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls fired after the abnormality determination before the affirmative determination in step S1903 or after the setting change has reached the specified number. In this embodiment, the specified number is 30,000, and considering that the firing cycle of the game balls is 0.6 sec, it takes about 6 hours when the game balls are continuously fired. The specified number is reached by passing.

If a negative determination is made in step S1903, that is, if sufficient data cannot be secured, the abnormality notification process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, the process proceeds to step S1904. In step S1904, the winning probability of the general winning opening 81 is calculated from the number of winnings to the general winning opening 81 and the number of shots of the game ball after the change to the current setting, and the probability falls within the above threshold value. Determine if it is.

If it is within the threshold range, a negative determination is made in step S1905, and the abnormality notification process is terminated as it is. If it is out of the threshold range, an affirmative determination is made in step S1905, and the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, the values of the abnormality notification counters provided in the various counter areas 465 of the RAM 444 of the notification / effect control device 140 are updated (1 addition).

In the following step S1907, it is determined whether or not the value of the abnormality notification counter has reached the maximum (five times in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S1907, the abnormality notification process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1907, the process proceeds to step S1908 to execute the abnormality notification start process. By executing the abnormality notification start processing, the abnormality notification is executed by the speaker unit 29 and the error display lamp unit 27 of the front door frame 14.

Returning to the description of step S1901, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, that is, if an abnormality is being notified, the process proceeds to step S1909. In step S1909, it is determined whether or not the abnormality notification release operation has been performed. If a negative determination is made in step S1909, the abnormality notification process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1909, the process proceeds to step S1910. In step S1910, the abnormality notification release process is executed. As a result, the abnormality notification being executed by the speaker unit 29 and the error display lamp unit 27 is canceled, and the value of the abnormality notification counter is cleared to "0".

When the abnormality is determined using the threshold value, the following effects can be expected by setting the threshold value for each set value as shown in the present embodiment. For example, when the calculated winning probability falls within any threshold range of any of the settings 1 to 3 as shown in the winning probability Y1 of FIG. 42, or from any threshold range as shown in the winning probability Y4. If it deviates, there is no effect on the certainty of the judgment. However, in a configuration in which the determination result differs depending on the threshold value as shown in the winning probability Y2 and the winning probability Y3, the certainty of the abnormality determination may be affected. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the threshold value is switched for each set value, it may be determined that what is originally out of the threshold value is within the threshold value. It is possible to suppress that what is within the threshold range is determined to be out of the threshold range. This can improve the certainty of abnormality monitoring and contribute to the improvement of reliability of the monitoring function.

Due to the characteristics of a gaming machine having a setting changing function, the behavior of the gaming ball may differ depending on the set value, and the probability of entering the ball may differ depending on the set value. Therefore, in a configuration in which the game status is monitored and predetermined processing (for example, abnormality notification) is performed based on the monitoring result (judgment result), a judgment is made when any set value is to be uniquely judged. It becomes difficult to improve the certainty of the result. For example, when the reference information is set so as to correspond to all the set values, it is assumed that the range of the reference information becomes large and it becomes difficult to improve the certainty. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the reference information is provided for each set value, the certainty of the judgment result can be improved and the reliability of the gaming machine (particularly the monitoring device) can be suitably improved. can.

The determination process is simplified by making the determination limited to the current set value instead of making the determination for all the set values (settings 1 to 3) given to the gaming machine. be able to. This is a preferable configuration for reducing the control load associated with the addition of the monitoring function.

The threshold value used for abnormality determination can be unified so that all the set values are shared. However, in such a configuration, it is assumed that the abnormality determination becomes excessively strict and the abnormality notification occurs frequently, or the abnormality determination becomes excessively loose and the abnormality is easily overlooked. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, the occurrence of these inconveniences can be suitably suppressed by configuring the threshold values to be used properly according to the set values.

The content is not limited to the description of the fourth embodiment described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the fourth embodiment, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to the fourth embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification example 1>
In the fourth embodiment, the case where the variable winning device 82 is arranged on the flow path to the general winning opening 81 has been illustrated, but for example, the electric accessory 91 is attached to the flow path to the general winning opening 81. Even in the configuration in which the operating port 83b is arranged, there may be a difference in the winning probability to the general winning port 81 depending on the set value. That is, the support mode by the electric accessory 91 is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode when a big hit result is obtained. Regarding the jackpot result that triggers the switching of the support mode, the occurrence rate differs depending on the set value. Therefore, there is a difference in the winning probability to the general winning opening 81 depending on the set value. Also in such a configuration, the certainty of abnormality determination can be suitably improved by providing a difference in the threshold value according to the set value, as in the configuration shown in the present embodiment.

<Modification 2>
In the fourth embodiment, the configuration in which the winning rate to the general winning opening 81 decreases as the set value is advantageous to the player has been described. For example, the probability of winning the general winning opening 81 on the right route is higher than the general winning opening 81 on the left route so that the set value is more advantageous to the player. In the case of an increasing configuration, a threshold value is set according to such a difference in winning probability, and the threshold value for setting 3 <threshold value for setting 2 <threshold value for setting 1 is set to determine an abnormality. The certainty can be suitably improved.

<Modification example 3>
In the configuration in which the game state can be grasped by the notification / effect control device 140, the threshold value may be changed depending on the game state. For example, a threshold value in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, a threshold value in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and a threshold value corresponding to the open / close execution mode may be individually provided for each of the settings 1 to 3.

<Fifth Embodiment>
As shown in the fourth embodiment, in the configuration for monitoring the winning probability, by securing a large number of samples, further improvement in the certainty of abnormality monitoring can be expected. In the present embodiment, the main configuration is the same as that of the fourth embodiment, but the fourth embodiment and the configuration are different in that the number of samples is increased and the certainty is further improved. It's different. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. FIG. 43A is a block diagram showing the monitoring device 600, FIG. 43B is a schematic view showing the information stored in the monitoring device 600, and FIG. 44 is executed by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality notification processing.

As shown in FIG. 43A, the storage unit 604 of the monitoring device 600 is provided with a temporary storage area 607 in addition to the first storage area 605 and the second storage area 606. The temporary storage area 607 is provided with 100 addresses for each of the upper operating port 83a, the lower operating port 83b, the general winning port 81, and the variable winning device 82, and each address is a target. The number of winnings to the entry section is stored every time a specified number (10,000 in this embodiment) of game balls are launched. These winning numbers are stored in association with the set values at that time. If new information is acquired in a situation where all addresses are filled, the information will be overwritten in order from the oldest information.

FIG. 43 (b) illustrates a group of information for a general winning opening. Each address stores the number of winnings for each predetermined number of shots, information on the set value, and information on whether or not the setting has been changed. For example, the 9th address stores information that the set value is switched from "1" to "2" on the way.

Next, the abnormality notification process will be described with reference to FIG. 44. It should be noted that the abnormality notification process is configured to be executed for each of the various winning parts where the winning probability may differ depending on the set value, but in the following description, it relates to the winning monitoring to the general winning opening 81. The abnormality notification process is described, and the description is omitted because the abnormality notification process related to winning a prize in another ball entry section is the same as that.

(Abnormality notification processing)
In the abnormality notification process in the present embodiment, first, it is determined in step S2001 whether or not the abnormality notification is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2002 to execute the information acquisition process. In the information acquisition process, information regarding the number of shots of the game ball is acquired from the monitoring device 600.

In the following step S2003, it is determined whether or not the determination condition for abnormality determination is satisfied. Specifically, that is, it is determined whether or not the number of shots has reached the specified number and the information in the temporary storage area 607 has been updated. In this embodiment, the specified number is 10,000, which corresponds to about 100 minutes in view of the fact that the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 sec.

If a negative determination is made in step S2003, that is, if the data has not been updated, the abnormality notification process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, the process proceeds to step S2004. In step S2004, a predetermined number of information corresponding to the same set value as the current set value is read from the information stored in each address of the temporary storage area 607 in order from the newest one. For example, as shown in FIG. 45, when the current setting value is "1", five pieces of information corresponding to the same setting value are read in order from the youngest address (new information). In this case, the information whose set value is changed in the middle (for example, the information stored in the fifth address) is excluded from the reading target.

After executing the process of step S2004, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, the winning probability is calculated from the read information. By securing a large number of samples for calculating the winning probability in this way, the certainty of the determination result in the determination process in step S2006 is improved. If the winning probability to the general winning opening 81 is within the above threshold value, a negative determination is made in step S2007, and the abnormality notification process is terminated as it is. If it is out of the threshold range, an affirmative determination is made in step S2007, and the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, the values of the abnormality notification counters provided in the various counter areas 465 of the RAM 444 of the notification / effect control device 140 are updated (1 addition).

In the following step S2009, it is determined whether or not the value of the abnormality notification counter has reached the maximum (five times in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S2009, the abnormality notification process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2009, the process proceeds to step S2010 to execute the abnormality notification start process. By executing the abnormality notification start processing, the abnormality notification is executed by the speaker unit 29 and the error display lamp unit 27 of the front door frame 14.

Returning to the description of step S2001, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, that is, if an abnormality is being notified, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether or not the abnormality notification release operation has been performed. If a negative determination is made in step S2011, the abnormality notification process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2011, the process proceeds to step S2012. In step S2012, the abnormality notification release process is executed. As a result, the abnormality notification being executed by the speaker unit 29 and the error display lamp unit 27 is canceled, and the value of the abnormality notification counter is cleared to "0".

A set value is associated with the information on the number of winnings stored in the monitoring device 600. Therefore, it is possible to read and divert the information corresponding to the same set value as the current set value from the information (actual result) stored in the past. As a result, even when the winning mode is accidentally out of the threshold range, it is possible to prevent such an accidental event from being determined as abnormal. Here, when the past information is used and the information with other set values is read, the certainty of the abnormality determination is lowered. On the other hand, if the past information is completely ignored and the abnormality determination is performed by focusing on the current information, there is a high possibility that the variation due to the above-mentioned accidental circumstances is determined as an abnormality. In this respect, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, even when the past information is diverted, the set values can be narrowed down to the same ones, so that the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed. Therefore, the certainty of abnormality determination can be suitably improved.

If the monitoring device 600 is configured to monitor the ball entry status, for example, when an event occurs in which the ball entry frequency greatly deviates from the design value due to deformation of a game nail or the like, it is possible to detect it at an early stage. can. This is preferable in order to suppress the disadvantages of the game hall and the player and improve the reliability of the game machine. Here, in a gaming machine having a setting changing function, the behavior of the gaming ball may differ depending on the set value, and the winning probability to various winning portions such as the general winning opening 81 may differ. In the monitoring device 600 shown in the present embodiment, the winning information is stored in a state of being associated with the set value. In such a configuration, since the ball entry information can be sorted according to the set value, it is possible to improve the determination accuracy when determining whether or not the ball enters the threshold value. This can increase the certainty of the monitoring result in the winning monitoring and contribute to the improvement of the reliability of the gaming machine.

In order to monitor the winning situation, it is important to handle the temporary variation in the winning frequency. For example, if the bias of winning is temporarily large, it is difficult to identify whether it is due to an accidental factor, but by diverting past information and calculating the average etc. Variation can be reduced. That is, it is preferable to secure a certain amount of reference data (sample) in making the determination. However, since some of the stored data have different corresponding setting values as described above, the certainty of the data is lowered when they are collectively referred to. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the winning information corresponding to the same setting value as the current setting value is selected from the winning information stored in the past and used for the determination, the above-mentioned description is made. The effect can be suitably exhibited.

The content is not limited to the description of the fifth embodiment described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the fifth embodiment, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to the fifth embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification example 1>
In the fifth embodiment described above, information is stored in the temporary storage area 607 even if the set value is changed in the middle, but the set value is changed in the case where the set value is changed in the middle. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the information is deleted at that time. By avoiding the address being filled with information that is not substantially used, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as a shortage of information that can be referred to.

<Modification 2>
If the set value is changed before the number of shots of the game ball reaches the specified number, the accumulation of new information may be started from the time when the set value is changed. As a result, it is possible to avoid information that corresponds to a plurality of set values (information that is practically difficult to use).

<Modification example 3>
It is also possible to set the upper limit of storage for each set value for the winning number information stored in the temporary storage area 607. Even in a gaming machine having a setting change function, the setting is not always changed frequently, and the same setting value may be maintained for a certain period of time. In such a case, if the stored winning number information is biased by the set value, there is a concern that the effect of improving the certainty of the abnormality determination cannot be exerted well. For example, if the information in setting 1 is excessively small even though settings 1 to 3 are provided as setting values, when the determination in setting 1 is executed under the situation. It is assumed that there will be a shortage of referenceable samples (data) and the certainty of abnormality judgment will decrease. In this respect, if the upper limit is defined in the winning number information that can be stored for each set value as shown in this modification, it is possible to preferably suppress the decrease in the certainty of determination due to the shortage of samples.

<Modification example 4>
The address in the temporary storage area 607 may be divided for each set value. For example, when the temporary storage area is composed of 99 addresses, the temporary storage area is allocated so that the address for setting 1 is 33, the address for setting 2 is 33, and the address for setting 3 is 33. It is good.

<Modification 5>
In the fifth embodiment, when the winning number information is newly stored in the situation where the winning number information is stored in all the addresses constituting the temporary storage area 607, the oldest winning number information is used. The information is overwritten on the stored address (# 100 address in the fifth embodiment), but the present invention is not limited to this. When newly storing the winning number information, the number of winning number information stored for each set value is specified, and the winning number corresponding to the set value is obtained for the set value in which the winning number information is relatively small. It is also possible to overwrite the oldest information among the numerical information. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the bias of the stored winning number information for each set value.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment described above, the number of winnings is stored in a state associated with the set value, and the past information corresponding to the same set value as the current set value is diverted to determine the certainty of abnormality determination. The configuration was improved. The present embodiment is similar to the fifth embodiment in that the certainty of abnormality determination is improved, but a specific configuration for exerting such an effect is the same as that of the fifth embodiment. It's different. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 46, focusing on the differences from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 46A is a schematic diagram showing the flow of information processing in the monitoring device 600, and FIG. 46B is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the correction coefficient.

As shown in FIG. 46A, the prize ball command input from the main control device 162 to the monitoring device 600 includes information indicating the occurrence of a prize and information on a set value at the time when the prize is generated. ing. The information acquisition unit 603 of the monitoring device 600 that has received the prize ball command creates prize determination information from this information. Specifically, the winning determination information is created by multiplying the number of winnings by the correction coefficient. The created winning judgment information is cumulatively stored in the youngest address (# 1 address) among the above addresses. When the number of shots reaches the specified number, the stored information is shifted, and the newly acquired information is stored in the # 1 address.

Here, the correction coefficient will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (b). The correction coefficient is provided for each set value. In the present embodiment, the correction coefficient for setting 1 is "1.02", the correction coefficient for setting 2 is "1", and the correction coefficient for setting 3 is "1". It is "0.97".

For example, when setting 1 and setting 2 are compared, the actual winning probability to the general winning opening 81 when considering firing the game ball to each of the left and right routes according to the progress of the game is slightly higher. There will be a gap. Specifically, in setting 1, the probability of winning the general winning opening 81 is slightly lower than that in setting 2. The correction coefficient for setting 1 is a value obtained by dividing the winning probability in setting 2 by the winning probability in setting 1. If a prize is generated in setting 1, the number of prizes is estimated by multiplying the number of prizes by the correction coefficient "1.02" for setting 1 assuming that the current setting is setting 2. do. That is, in reality, the prize generated in setting 1 is converted to the prize generated in setting 2.

Even when setting 2 and setting 3 are compared, there is a slight difference in the actual winning probability to the general winning opening 81 when considering firing the game ball to each route on the left and right according to the progress of the game. Occurs. Specifically, in setting 3, the probability of winning the general winning opening 81 is slightly higher than in setting 2. Therefore, the correction coefficient for setting 3 is a value obtained by dividing the substantial winning probability in setting 2 by the substantial winning probability in setting 3. If a prize is generated in setting 3, the number of prizes is estimated by multiplying the number of prizes by the correction coefficient "0.97" for setting 3 assuming that the current setting is setting 2. do. That is, in reality, the prize generated in setting 3 is converted to the prize generated in setting 2.

In the present embodiment, the threshold value is not set for each set value, but is common to each of the settings 1 to 3. Specifically, the threshold value for setting 2 shown in the fourth embodiment is a common threshold value in settings 1 to 3.

When determining whether or not the winning probability is within the threshold range in the abnormality determination process, the information stored in each address of the temporary storage area 607 of the monitoring device 600 is acquired. Become. In the present embodiment, it is not necessary to select information based on the set value. Due to such circumstances, the number of addresses is also smaller than that of the fifth embodiment.

In a gaming machine having a setting change function, the selection of the set value varies, and the set value at the time of performing the abnormality determination and the set value of the winning information stored in the past do not always match. Here, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, even if the stored sample is associated with a setting value different from the current setting value, it is converted according to the current setting value by correction. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to secure winning information that can be used as a sample of abnormality determination regardless of the difference in the set value. This can contribute to improving the certainty of the determination result.

In a configuration in which the variable winning device 82 is arranged upstream of the general winning opening 81d, the movement of the variable winning device 82 may cause a difference in the frequency of winning the general winning opening 81d. Therefore, in monitoring the winning status of the general winning opening 81d, as shown in the present embodiment, the winning information stored by determining the correction value according to the winning frequency of the general winning opening 81d is stored. Can be suitably improved in conversion accuracy when converting to information corresponding to the current set value by using the correction value.

The content is not limited to the description of the sixth embodiment described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the sixth embodiment, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to the sixth embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification example 1>
In the sixth embodiment, the value obtained by multiplying the number of prizes by the correction coefficient is stored in the address, but the timing of correction is arbitrary. For example, the correction may be performed at the timing when the number of shots of the game balls reaches the specified number or the timing when the setting change occurs, or the correction may be performed at the timing immediately before the determination using the threshold value. good. Incidentally, when the correction is performed immediately before the determination, the subject of the correction does not necessarily have to be the monitoring device 600, and the notification / effect control device 140 may perform the correction. However, when the correction is performed immediately before the determination, it is necessary to store the set value together with the information indicating the number of winnings in the monitoring device 600. Therefore, the amount of stored information tends to increase. In view of such circumstances, it is technically significant to configure the monitoring device 600 to store the corrected information.

<Modification 2>
In the sixth embodiment, the correction coefficient for setting 1 and the correction coefficient for setting 3 are determined with reference to setting 2, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the correction coefficient for setting 2 and the correction coefficient for setting 3 may be determined based on setting 1, or the correction coefficient for setting 1 and the correction coefficient for setting 2 may be determined based on setting 3. ..

<7th embodiment>
As shown in each of the above embodiments, it is preferable to use the monitoring device 600 to monitor the main control device 162 and the like in order to improve the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 and enhance the crime prevention function. .. One of the features of the present embodiment is that the various effects are more preferably exhibited. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50, the configuration according to the above device will be described focusing on the differences from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the abnormality notification processing, FIG. 48 is a timing chart showing the flow of abnormality notification release, FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the abnormality notification release process, and FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the monitoring device 600. Since the main configuration is the same as that of the fourth embodiment in the present embodiment, the description of these common configurations will be omitted.

First, an abnormality notification process executed as a part of the periodic process by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47.

(Abnormality notification processing)
In the abnormality notification process, first, the information acquisition process is executed in step S2101. In the information acquisition process, information on the number of winnings from the monitoring device 600 to the general winning opening 81 and information on the number of shots of the game ball are acquired.

In the following step S2102, it is determined whether or not the determination condition for abnormality determination is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls fired to the game area PE after the above abnormality determination or the number of game balls fired to the game area PE after the setting change has reached the specified number. In this embodiment, the specified number is 30,000. As described above, since the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 sec, the number of shots reaches a predetermined number by continuing the firing of the game ball for about 6 hours.

If a negative determination is made in step S2102, that is, if sufficient data cannot be secured, the abnormality notification process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, the winning probability of the general winning opening 81 is calculated from the number of winnings to the general winning opening 81 and the number of shots of the game ball after being changed to the current set value, and the probability is out of the above threshold range. Determine if it is.

If it is out of the threshold range, an affirmative determination is made in step S2104, and the process proceeds to step S2105. In step S2105, "1" is added to the abnormality notification counters provided in the various counter areas 465 of the RAM 444. If it is within the threshold range, a negative determination is made in step S2104, and the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2106, the abnormality notification counters provided in the various counter areas 465 of the RAM 444 are subtracted by "1".

After executing the process of step S2105 or step S2106, the process proceeds to step S2107. In step S2107, it is determined whether or not the value of the abnormality notification counter has reached the reference value. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined whether or not the abnormality is being notified. If a negative determination is made in step S2108, the abnormality notification start processing is executed in step S2109, and then the abnormality notification processing is terminated. By executing the abnormality notification start processing, the abnormality notification (specifically, a warning that an abnormality may have occurred) is executed by the speaker unit 29 and the error display lamp unit 27 of the front door frame 14. NS.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2108, the abnormality notification continuation process is executed in step S2110, and then the abnormality notification process ends. When the abnormality notification continuation process is executed, the abnormality notification level is raised by one step. Specifically, the volume of the warning sound output from the speaker unit 29 and the amount of light of the error display lamp unit 27 are increased.

Returning to the description of step S2107, if a negative determination is made in step S2107, that is, if the value of the abnormality notification counter is less than the reference value, the process proceeds to step S2111. In step S2111, it is determined whether or not the abnormality is being notified. If the error notification is not in progress, the error notification process is terminated as it is. If the abnormality is being notified, the process proceeds to step S2112 to execute the abnormality notification end process. As a result, the abnormality notification that has been executed up to that point is canceled.

Here, the flow of canceling the abnormality notification will be described with reference to FIG. 48. In the present embodiment, (1) the value of the abnormality notification counter is lower than the reference value, and (2) the abnormality notification cancellation operation is executed are the triggers for canceling the abnormality notification.

When the winning probability deviates from the threshold value, the value of the abnormality notification counter is added, and when the winning probability falls within the threshold value, the value of the abnormality notification counter is subtracted. At the timing of tc1 when the value of the abnormality notification counter is added and reaches the reference value which is a guideline for starting the abnormality notification, the abnormality notification is started by the speaker unit 29 and the error display lamp unit 27. Even after that, the value of the abnormality notification counter continues to exceed the reference value, so that the level of abnormality notification is raised. By raising the level of the abnormality notification, the volume output from the speaker unit 29 increases and the amount of light of the error display lamp unit 27 increases. As a result, the attention of the player or the like can be easily directed to the abnormality notification.

When the hall manager cancels the abnormality notification at the timing of tk2, the abnormality notification is temporarily released. However, at this point, the value of the abnormality notification counter still exceeds the reference value, and the abnormality notification starts again based on the fact that the value of the abnormality notification counter increases in the range exceeding the reference value at the subsequent timing of tk3. Will be done. That is, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, although the abnormality notification can be temporarily stopped only by the operation of canceling the abnormality notification, it is necessary to eliminate the cause of the abnormality in the winning probability in order to completely end the abnormality notification. There is.

After the cause of the abnormality notification is eliminated, it is assumed that the winning probability is likely to fall within the threshold range, and the value of the abnormality notification counter is subtracted each time the winning probability is confirmed. At the timing of tc4 when the value of the abnormality notification counter falls below the reference value, the continuous abnormality notification is canceled.

The execution of the abnormality notification causes the player to hesitate to play the game on the gaming machine. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the game hall is trying to eliminate the root cause, by taking a provisional response by canceling the abnormality notification, the chance that the abnormality notification will be noticed by the player is reduced. It is supposed to be. Here, in determining the winning probability, a different threshold value is used for each set value. For example, when the calculated winning probability is below the threshold value, the threshold value can be lowered by temporarily switching the set value to the side that is advantageous to the player.

For example, assuming that the winning probability is the winning probability Y2 shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 42, if the set value is set 3, the winning probability Y2 deviates from the threshold value, but the set value is set 2 or 1 If so, the winning probability Y2 is within the threshold range. That is, if the value of the abnormality notification counter becomes large in setting 3 and exceeds the above reference value, the value of the abnormality notification counter can be lowered by changing the setting value to setting 2 or setting 1. That is, even if the cause of the abnormality notification is not eliminated, the occurrence of the abnormality notification can be suppressed.

In such a configuration, there is a concern that the cause of the abnormality notification may be concealed by intentionally switching the above-mentioned set values. One of the features of the present embodiment is that the reliability of the monitoring function is improved by devising a method for detecting such an act. Hereinafter, the device will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an abnormality notification release process executed as part of the periodic process by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140, and FIG. 50 is a schematic view showing the configuration of the monitoring device 600.

(Process for canceling abnormal notification)
In the abnormality notification release process, first, it is determined in step S2201 whether or not the setting change operation has been performed. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process for canceling the abnormality notification is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202.

In step S2202, it is determined whether or not the abnormality notification is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, the abnormality notification release process is executed in step S2203. As a result, the abnormality notification in the speaker unit 29 and the error display lamp unit 27 is canceled. In the following step S2204, it is determined whether or not the setting change is performed so that the threshold value changes to the same side as the deviation of the winning probability by the setting change operation this time.

For example, in the situation where the setting is 2, if the winning probability is below the lower limit of the threshold corresponding to the setting 2 and is out of the threshold range, the setting is changed to the setting 3. In step S2204, a negative determination is made. In the following description, such a setting change operation is referred to as a type 1 release operation.

On the other hand, for example, in the situation where the setting is 2, if the winning probability is below the lower limit of the threshold corresponding to the setting 2 and is out of the threshold range, the setting is changed to the setting 1. When the change is made, an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. Similarly, for example, in the situation where the setting is 3, if the winning probability is below the lower limit of the threshold corresponding to the setting 3 and is out of the threshold range, the setting 2 or the setting 1 is changed. When the value is changed to, an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. In the following description, such a setting change operation is referred to as a type 2 release operation.

If a negative determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, the first type release operation information transmission process is executed, and then the abnormality notification release process is terminated. In the type 1 release operation information transmission process, information indicating that the type 1 release operation has been performed is transmitted from the notification / effect control device 140 to the monitoring device 600. The second storage area 606 of the monitoring device 600 is provided with a first-class release operation number storage area 635 for storing the number of times the first-class release operation has been performed (see FIG. 50), and is based on the above information. The information of the type 1 release operation number storage area 635 is updated. Specifically, the value of the type 1 release operation number counter provided in the type 1 release operation number storage area 635 is added by "1".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2206. In step S2206, the second type release operation information transmission process is executed, and then the abnormality notification release process is terminated. In the type 2 release operation information transmission process, information indicating that the type 2 release operation has been performed is transmitted from the notification / effect control device 140 to the monitoring device 600. The second storage area 606 of the monitoring device 600 is provided with a second type release operation number storage area 636 for storing the number of times the second type release operation has been performed (see FIG. 50), and is based on the above information. The information of the type 2 release operation number storage area 636 is updated. Specifically, the value of the type 2 release operation number counter provided in the type 2 release operation number storage area 636 is added by "1".

The monitoring device 600 performs a notification process for notifying the number of times the type 1 release operation is executed and the number of times the type 2 release operation is executed when the release request operation of the information on the number of times of release is performed. As a result, for example, the number of times each release operation is executed is displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253.

If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring information, an abnormality notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to promptly take measures against the abnormality, and it is possible to suppress the player, the game hall, and the like from suffering a disadvantage. However, even if the abnormality is dealt with, if the cause is not resolved, the abnormality notification will be repeated. When consideration is given to the replacement of players, hall managers, etc., it becomes difficult to identify how many abnormalities are repeated. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the number of times the abnormality notification is released based on the release operation and the release operation is executed is stored. Therefore, it is possible to grasp after the fact how much the release operation is performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the oversight of repeated abnormalities and contribute to the improvement of the reliability of the gaming machine.

Even if the fraudster intentionally cancels the abnormality notification to conceal the fraud, the number of cancellations is stored. From this, it can be estimated that there is a possibility that the fraud was intentionally concealed from the stored number of cancellations. Incidentally, for example, in a configuration that stores the number of occurrences of an abnormality or the number of notifications, it is possible to identify the fact of the occurrence of an abnormality, but it is difficult to identify whether it is due to an accidental factor or an artificial factor. Become. In view of such circumstances, there is a clear technical significance in memorizing the number of cancellations.

If the state of the gaming machine is taken into consideration when storing the number of times of release, it is possible to improve the estimation accuracy of whether or not the release operation is fraudulent. For example, if the release operation is performed in a situation where the release operation is normally difficult or impossible, it can be found that the release operation is likely to be illegal. ..

For example, assuming a configuration in which the threshold value for determining an abnormality differs depending on the set value, it cannot be denied that such a difference may be used to cheat the occurrence of an abnormality. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the number of times of release is stored when the set value is changed in association with the release operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the release operation suspected of being fraudulent from being confused with other release operations. This is a preferable configuration for improving the crime prevention function of the gaming machine.

In a configuration in which the winning frequency to the winning portion such as the general winning opening 81d differs depending on the set value, the certainty of the determination result can be improved by setting the threshold value to be switched for each set value. However, in such a configuration, there is a possibility that the fact may be deceived by abusing the threshold value switching function even though it should be determined that an abnormality has actually occurred. Cannot be denied. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, when the set value (threshold value) is switched in conjunction with the cancellation of the abnormality notification, such a cancellation operation is stored separately from other cancellation operations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the release operation for the purpose of fraud from being overlooked.

The content is not limited to the description of the seventh embodiment described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the seventh embodiment, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to the seventh embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification example 1>
In the seventh embodiment, the setting change operation for changing the threshold value to the same side as the side where the winning probability is out of the threshold value is stored as the second type release operation, but to the same side. If the winning probability that was previously determined is within the threshold range corresponding to the new set value, the setting change operation may be stored as the second type release operation.

<Modification 2>
In the seventh embodiment, the abnormality notification is canceled by the setting change operation, that is, the setting change operation also serves as the cancellation operation of the abnormality notification. It is also possible to change this so that the release operation for abnormality notification is separated from the setting change operation.

<Modification example 3>
The specific mode of abnormality notification is arbitrary. When an abnormality has occurred, it is possible to configure the configuration so that the setting suggestion described later is likely to occur as a part of the abnormality notification. It should be noted that this configuration can also be applied to the first to sixth embodiments.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration related to the cancellation of the abnormality notification is different from each of the above-described embodiments. Specifically, the configuration is such that whether or not the abnormality notification is being performed is specified on the main control device 162 side, and whether or not the abnormality notification can be canceled is also determined by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162. It has become. Hereinafter, the configuration relating to the cancellation of the abnormality notification in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53, and the description of the configuration common to the other embodiments will be omitted.

First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51, the abnormality notification release process executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described. The abnormality notification release process is a process executed as a part of the normal process.

(Process for canceling abnormal notification)
In the process for canceling the abnormality notification, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the abnormality notification is being performed. If it is determined that the abnormality notification is not in progress, the processing for canceling the abnormality notification is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step S2301 that the abnormality is being notified, an affirmative determination is made in step S2301 and the process proceeds to step S2302. In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the setting change key has been switched to the ON state. If a negative determination is made in step S2302, the process for canceling the abnormality notification is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2302, the process proceeds to step S2303.

In step S2303, a special operation flag indicating that the setting change key has been switched to the ON state during the abnormality notification is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. After that, in step S2304, the abnormality notification release process is executed. In the abnormality notification release process, an abnormality notification release command for canceling the abnormality notification is set in the notification / effect control device 140. This abnormality notification release command is output to the notification / effect control device 140 in the external output processing (step S501) of the normal processing. The notification / effect control device 140 cancels the abnormality notification based on the reception of this abnormality notification release command.

The MPU 402 of the main control device 162 has a function of forcibly changing the initial setting value at the time of the subsequent setting change operation to a predetermined set value when the setting change key is switched to the ON state during the abnormality notification. ing. Hereinafter, the setting change processing executed as a part of the normal processing by the MPU 402 in the main control device 162 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Process for changing settings)
In the setting change process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 404. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the process proceeds to step S2402, and it is determined whether or not the setting change key is in the ON state. If a negative determination is made in step S2402, the process for changing this setting is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, the process proceeds to step S2403. In step S2403, it is determined whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied. The condition for shifting to the setting change mode is set as a condition that the setting change switch 166 is operated in addition to the same condition as the setting change processing shown in FIG. 35. That is, under the condition that the various conditions shown in FIG. 35 are satisfied, the setting change switch 166 is operated once to shift to the setting change mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403, the present setting change process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, the process proceeds to step S2404. In step S2404, it is determined whether or not the special operation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If a negative determination is made in step S2404, the process proceeds to step S2405.

In step S2405, the set value before shifting to the setting change mode is specified, and the specified setting value is set as the setting value at the time of shifting to the setting change mode. In other words, when shifting to the setting change mode in a situation where the special operation flag is not stored, the setting value before shifting to the setting change mode is inherited as the initial setting value in the setting change mode. Become.

Returning to the description of step S2404, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2404, the process proceeds to step S2406. In step S2406, the setting 1 most advantageous to the player is set as the setting value at the time of transition to the setting change mode, regardless of the setting value before the transition to the setting change mode. In the following step S2407, the special operation flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 is erased.

After executing the process of step S2407 or step S2405, the process proceeds to step S2408. In step S2408, the setting change mode transition process is executed. In the setting change mode transition process, the setting change mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, display control is performed so that the setting value display unit 168 displays the current setting value, and the setting change switch 166 is used. Start accepting operations.

Returning to the description of step S2401, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, that is, if the setting change mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, the process proceeds to step S2409. In step S2409, it is determined whether or not the setting change operation has been performed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2409, the process proceeds to step S2410. In step S2410, the setting change operation corresponding process is executed. In the setting change operation corresponding process, the display control of the setting value display unit 168 is performed so that the setting value currently selected by the setting change operation is displayed on the setting value display unit 168.

Returning to the description of step S2409, if a negative determination is made in step S2409, the process proceeds to step S2411. In step S2411, it is determined whether or not the setting change key is in the OFF state. If a negative determination is made in step S2411, the process for changing this setting is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2411, the process proceeds to step S2412. In step S2412, the setting change process is executed. In the setting change process, the selected setting value is specified, and the setting value is set as the setting value in the subsequent games. For example, when setting 1 is selected, the setting 1 flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, and when setting 2 is selected, the setting 2 flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Is stored, and when setting 3 is selected, the setting 3 flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. As a result, the winning / failing lottery table referred to in the subsequent lottery process is switched.

After executing the process of step S2412, the setting change mode end process is executed in step S2413, and then the setting change process ends. In the setting change mode end process, the setting change mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 is erased, and the display control is performed so that the setting value display unit 168 is hidden.

Next, the main process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53.

(Main processing)
In the main process, first, in step S2501, the start-up process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, it waits for about 500 msec to wait for the control board (payout control device 242 or the like) on the slave side to be in an operable state.

In the following step S2502, it is determined whether or not 1 sec, which is the permission prohibition period, has elapsed since the start-up process of step S2501. If 1 sec has not elapsed, the process of step S2502 is executed again. This time is measured by counting the number of processes in step S2502. For example, if the time required from the negative determination in step S2502 to the execution of the process of step S2502 again is 0.1 msec, the count value becomes 10,000 times, and after the start-up process of step S2501. It is determined that 1 sec has passed since. The specific configuration of the time measurement is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock. If it is determined in step S2502 that 1 sec has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2503.

In step S2503, access to the RAM 404 is permitted. After that, in step S2504, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply / firing control device 243 is turned on, and in the following step S2505, whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 404. Is determined. Further, in step S2506, the RAM determination value is calculated, and in the subsequent step S2507, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 404. It is also possible to determine the validity of the stored data based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 404 are correctly stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. If the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to steps S2508 to S2509. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality of the stored data is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to steps S2508 to S2509 in the same manner. In step S2508, the used area of RAM 404 is cleared to 0, and in step S2509, the initialization process of RAM 404 is executed.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, the power failure flag storage area is stored in step S2515, provided that the power failure flag is stored and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Clear the power failure flag stored in.

After executing the process of step S2515 or step S2509, the process proceeds to step S2510. In step S2510, it is determined whether or not the special operation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, and whether or not the RAM erase switch is operated. When the special operation flag is stored or the RAM erase switch is operated, an affirmative determination is made in step S2510 and the process proceeds to step S2511. In step S2511, the setting 1 that is most advantageous to the player is set as the setting value when the power is turned on. If the special operation flag is not stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 and the RAM erase switch is not operated, the process proceeds to step S2512. In step S2512, the same set value as the set value when the power is turned off is set as the set value when the power is turned on. For example, if the setting is 2 when the power is turned off, the setting is set to 2.

After executing the process of step S2511 or step S2512, the process proceeds to step S2513. In step S2513, the initial command setting process is executed in order to output the initial command to the payout control device 242. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S2514, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later. The MPU of the payout control device 242 recognizes that communication with the main control device 162 is normally performed by inputting an initial command from the main control device 162.

If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring result, that fact is notified. As a result, for example, the manager of the game hall can be urged to take measures against the abnormality. It is preferable that the release operation can be performed without eliminating the cause of the abnormality in order to improve the convenience in the game hall. However, in such a configuration, the player and the game hall may suffer a disadvantage because the game is played again with the notification canceled without eliminating the cause of the abnormality. This is not preferable because it causes a decrease in reliability of the gaming machine. The set values are managed in the game hall and are directly linked to profits, so it is easy for the hall manager to pay close attention. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, when the release operation is performed, the initial set value at the time of setting change may be forcibly set to a predetermined set value. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the hall manager that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cause of the abnormality from being left as it is and to contribute to the improvement of the reliability of the gaming machine.

When the initial setting value is forcibly changed, if the setting value is a setting value that is frequently used in the game hall, it is easy to be confused in identifying whether or not the forcible change has occurred. I am concerned. Here, in the game hall, the chance that the set value that is advantageous to the player is used is less than the chance that the set value that is disadvantageous to the player is used. In the configuration shown in this feature, in consideration of such circumstances, the setting 1 which is most advantageous to the player is set as the initial setting value. Thereby, the above-mentioned confusion can be suppressed.

The setting change is not always performed every day, and the set value once determined may be maintained for a certain number of days. When such a situation is taken into consideration, it is possible to appropriately deal with such a situation by executing the takeover / forced change of the set value in the determination of the set value when the power is turned on shown in the present embodiment. ..

In a gaming machine of a type in which a gaming ball flows down the gaming area PE, the gaming nail may be deformed or the like by coming into contact with a gaming nail or the like arranged in the gaming area during cleaning or maintenance. When the flow path of the game ball changes due to such deformation, the ball enters at a frequency higher than the original design value, or the ball enters at a frequency lower than the original design value. This causes a disadvantage for the game hall and the player. Therefore, by configuring the monitoring device 600 to store the winning information, it is possible to identify that the above-mentioned inconvenience (abnormality) has occurred. However, winnings do not always occur at a constant frequency, and if the monitoring period is short, there will be some variation. On the other hand, when the monitoring period is set long, the variation can be suppressed, but it takes time to identify that the above-mentioned inconvenience has occurred. Under such circumstances, the configuration in which the notification based on the result of the abnormality determination can be arbitrarily canceled has an advantage that the accuracy of the determination result and the improvement of the responsiveness can be considered. However, in such a configuration, since it is difficult to visually identify the abnormality itself, there is a possibility that the fact will be forgotten after a certain amount of time has passed since the notification was released. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

The content is not limited to the description of the eighth embodiment described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the eighth embodiment, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to the eighth embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification example 1>
In the eighth embodiment, when the abnormality notification is canceled, the initial setting value at the time of shifting to the setting change mode is configured to be the most advantageous setting 1 for the player. It suffices if the setting value is switched to a setting value that is advantageous to the player as compared with the setting value before the change mode shift or when the above-mentioned abnormality notification is canceled. For example, in the case of setting 3, it becomes setting 2, in the case of setting 2, it becomes setting 1, and in the case of setting 1, it is possible to maintain the setting 1.

Further, when the abnormality notification is canceled, the initial setting value at the time of shifting to the setting change mode may be configured to be different from the setting value before the setting change.

<Modification 2>
It is optional whether or not to consider the operation of canceling the abnormality notification when resetting the set value in the main process. That is, while the initial value when the setting change operation is performed is changed to a predetermined set value (for example, setting 1), the set value is maintained even when the release operation is performed in the main process. It is also possible to. In such a configuration, the special operation flag may be excluded from the target of erasure by the RAM erase switch.

<Modification example 3>
In the eighth embodiment described above, the configuration in which the abnormality notification is canceled by turning on the setting key has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to cancel the abnormality notification by operating the setting change switch 166 after turning on the setting key. In this case, it may be configured to shift to the setting change mode as it is by operating the setting change switch 166, or it may shift to the setting change mode by performing another operation such as pressing and holding the setting change switch 166. May be good. Further, an operation unit for canceling the abnormality notification may be provided separately from the various operation units related to the setting change.

<9th embodiment>
One of the features of the present embodiment is that the set value is suggested to the player when a predetermined suggestion condition is satisfied while the game is in progress. Specifically, the first embodiment and configuration are configured in that the suggestion of the set value (hereinafter referred to as the setting suggestion) is executed in a part of the game times in which the reach effect corresponding to the deviation result is generated. Are different. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the setting suggestion will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. The description of the configuration common to the first embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 54 (a), when the power is turned on and when the setting is changed, information indicating the set value is output from the main control device 162 to the notification / effect control device 140. The RAM 444 of the notification / effect control device 140 is provided with a setting value storage area 468 for storing the set value, and the notification / effect control device 140 can specify the setting value in the main control device 162 by referring to this information. It has become.

The MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 determines whether or not to suggest the setting based on the set value. Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54 (b), a part of the setting suggestion process executed by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140, specifically, a part of the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 31). The effect setting process for generating the outlier reach to be configured will be described.

(Production setting process for loss reach)
In the effect setting process for generating the out-of-reach, first, in step S2601, the process of determining the variation display mode is executed. Specifically, the current variation display mode is determined based on the variation display time information included in the variation start command received from the main control device 162. For example, normal reach A when the variable display time is "10 sec", normal reach B when the variable display time is "15 sec", super reach A when the variable display time is "16 sec", and variable display. When the time is "17 sec", it is determined to execute Super Reach B, and when the variable display time is "18 sec", it is determined to execute Super Reach C (see FIG. 32).

In the following step S2602, the final stop symbol combination determination process is executed. Specifically, the symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the effective line is determined on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. Since this effect setting process corresponds to the out-of-reach, the same symbols are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, and those symbols are displayed on the effective line where the symbols are stopped and displayed. The different medium symbols are stopped and displayed.

After executing the process of step S2602, the process proceeds to step S2603. In step S2603, it is determined whether or not the variation display mode of the game times this time corresponds to Super Reach C. If a negative determination is made in step S2602, the present effect setting process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2602, the process proceeds to step S2604.

In step S2604, it is determined whether or not the reach symbol stopped and displayed on the effective line is the "7" symbol. That is, it is determined whether or not the reach line is formed by the "7" symbol constituting the upper symbol row Z1 and the "7" symbol constituting the lower symbol row Z3. If a negative determination is made in step S2604, the present effect setting process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, the process proceeds to step S2605. In step S2605, a setting suggestion possibility determination process is performed. Specifically, it is decided whether or not to suggest the setting by lottery. If it is determined in step S2605 that the setting suggestion is not performed, a negative determination is made in step S2606, and the present effect setting process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step S2605 to suggest the setting, an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, and the process proceeds to step S2607.

In step S2607, the rewriting process of the final stop symbol combination is executed. Specifically, the process of rewriting the symbol that is stopped and displayed on the valid line for the middle symbol string Z2 from the symbol that does not correspond to the setting suggestion to the symbol that corresponds to the setting suggestion is performed. In the present embodiment, the upper symbol: "7" symbol, the middle symbol: "1" symbol, the lower symbol: "7" symbol combination, the upper symbol: "7" symbol, the middle symbol: "2" symbol, The lower symbol: "7" symbol combination, the upper symbol: "7" symbol, the middle symbol: "4" symbol, and the lower symbol: "7" symbol symbol combination correspond to the setting suggestion.

For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), in the out-of-setting super reach C that does not correspond to the setting suggestion, the “5” symbol, which is the symbol that does not correspond to the setting suggestion, is on the reach line formed by the “7” symbol. Stop is displayed. Therefore, even if the final stop symbol combination is seen, it is difficult to estimate the set value from the contents. On the other hand, in the out-of-setting suggestion-corresponding Super Reach C, the symbol "1" corresponding to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed on the reach line formed by the "7" symbol. That is, even if the result is finally off, the set value is suggested by it, and the player can infer the set value from the suggested content. In this way, even if the result is out of order, by providing an opportunity to obtain information useful for guessing the set value, it is possible to prevent the expectation for the game from dropping rapidly due to the notification of the out-of-game result. doing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 56, the occurrence pattern of the setting suggestion will be supplementarily described. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the medium symbol that is stopped and displayed when the out-of-order super reach C occurs and the probability thereof.

As shown in FIG. 56 (a), when the single line disconnection super reach C due to the “7” symbol occurs during the low frequency support mode, the “1” symbol stops in the middle symbol row Z2 in the setting 1. The probability is 0.1%, and in setting 2 and setting 3, the probability that the "1" symbol stops in the middle symbol string Z2 is 0%. That is, when the "1" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol string Z2, it is determined that the set value is the most advantageous setting 1 for the player.

The probability that the "2" symbol corresponding to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 is 3.4% in setting 1, 3% in setting 2, and 4% in setting 3, and there is a slight difference. Has been done. When the "2" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the possibility of setting 2 is slightly lower than that of setting 1 and setting 3.

The probability that the "3" symbol that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 is 2% in all of the settings 1 to 3, and there is no difference between the settings. ..

The probability that the "4" symbol corresponding to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol string Z2 is 0.5% in setting 1, 1% in setting 2, and 0% in setting 3. That is, when the "4" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, it is determined that the set value is not the setting 3, which is the most disadvantageous to the player, that is, either the setting 1 or the setting 2. ..

The probability that the "5" symbol that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol string Z2 is 2% in all of the settings 1 to 3. The probability that the "6" symbol that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol string Z2 is 40% in all of the settings 1 to 3. The probability that the "8" symbol that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol string Z2 is 50% in all of the settings 1 to 3. The probability that the "9" symbol that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol string Z2 is 2% in all of the settings 1 to 3. That is, even if any of the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, the "8" symbol, and the "9" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the set value cannot be estimated from it. ..

In the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment, there is a difference in the degree of expectation of a jackpot result depending on the number of reach lines. Specifically, the double line (reach line x 2) super reach C is set to have a higher expectation of a jackpot result than the single line (reach line x 1) super reach C. The difference is also provided so that the probability of suggesting the setting is slightly higher in the double line than in the single line.

As shown in FIG. 56 (b), when the double line off super reach C due to the “7” symbol and the “8” symbol occurs during the low frequency support mode, in the setting 1, “1” is set in the middle symbol row Z2. The probability that the symbol will stop is 1.1%, and in setting 2 and setting 3, the probability that the "1" symbol will stop in the middle symbol row Z2 is 0%. That is, when the "1" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol string Z2, it is determined that the set value is the most advantageous setting 1 for the player.

The probability that the "2" symbol corresponding to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol string Z2 is 1.4% in setting 1, 1% in setting 2, and 4% in setting 3. When the "2" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the possibility of setting 2 is slightly lower than that of setting 1 and setting 3.

The probability that the "3" symbol that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 is 2% in all of the settings 1 to 3, and there is no difference between the settings. ..

The probability that the "4" symbol corresponding to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol string Z2 is 1.5% in setting 1, 3% in setting 2, and 0% in setting 3. That is, when the "4" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, it is determined that the set value is not the setting 3, which is the most disadvantageous to the player, that is, either the setting 1 or the setting 2. ..

The probability that the "5" symbol that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol string Z2 is 3% in all of the settings 1 to 3. The probability that the "6" symbol that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol string Z2 is 40% in all of the settings 1 to 3. The probability that the "9" symbol that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol string Z2 is 50% in all of the settings 1 to 3. That is, no matter which of the "5" symbol, the "6" symbol, and the "9" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol string Z2, the set value cannot be estimated from it.

As shown in FIG. 56 (c), when the double line off super reach C due to the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol occurs during the low frequency support mode, in the setting 1, "1" is set in the middle symbol row Z2. The probability that the symbol will stop is 1.1%, and in setting 2 and setting 3, the probability that the "1" symbol will stop in the middle symbol row Z2 is 0%. That is, when the "1" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol string Z2, it is determined that the set value is the most advantageous setting 1 for the player.

The probability that the "2" symbol corresponding to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol string Z2 is 1.4% in setting 1, 1% in setting 2, and 4% in setting 3. When the "2" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the possibility of setting 2 is slightly lower than that of setting 1 and setting 3.

The probability that the "3" symbol that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 is 2% in all of the settings 1 to 3, and there is no difference between the settings. ..

The probability that the "4" symbol corresponding to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol string Z2 is 1.5% in setting 1, 3% in setting 2, and 0% in setting 3. That is, when the "4" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, it is determined that the set value is not the setting 3, which is the most disadvantageous to the player, that is, either the setting 1 or the setting 2. ..

The probability that the "5" symbol that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol string Z2 is 40% in all of the settings 1 to 3. The probability that the "8" symbol that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol string Z2 is 50% in all of the settings 1 to 3. The probability that the "9" symbol that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol string Z2 is 30% in all of the settings 1 to 3. That is, no matter which of the "5" symbol, the "8" symbol, and the "9" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol string Z2, the set value cannot be estimated from it.

In the present embodiment, the high frequency support mode is out of the high frequency support mode and the occurrence frequency of the super reach C and the occurrence probability of the setting suggestion are higher than those in the low frequency support mode, and the high frequency support mode is in the high frequency support mode. Setting suggestions are given preferential treatment. In other words, it is a chance to suggest the setting during the high frequency support mode.

According to the ninth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a gaming machine having a setting changing function, the degree of advantage changes depending on the set value, so it is one of the pleasures to play the game while guessing the set value. Here, when the reach display is executed, the player's attention to the game tends to be high. By configuring the setting value to be suggested (setting suggestion) when the player's attention is high, the chance that the setting suggestion is overlooked can be reduced.

Further, when the reach display is executed, the winning result may be notified via the reach display, so that the degree of attention to the effect is increased. However, if it is notified that the result is out of the state in which the attention level is high in this way, the attention level to the game may be significantly reduced as the expectation is lowered. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion is performed in addition to the reach display, so that it is possible to suppress a large decrease in the degree of attention at the time of the disengagement result.

In the configuration in which the lottery result is clearly indicated by the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the display screen 253a, the player's attention is focused on the game area PE (specifically, the game ball flowing down the game area PE) when the reach display is executed. It is easy to move to the display screen 253a. Therefore, if the above-mentioned setting suggestion is executed on the display screen 253a, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the setting suggestion is overlooked even though the setting suggestion is performed.

In the configuration in which the hit result is notified via the reach display, the degree of attention to the variable display of the symbol is increased by shifting to the reach display. In this way, if the setting suggestion is made in a situation where the degree of attention is high, the above-mentioned chance of overlooking can be suitably reduced.

If the setting suggestion is executed by using the symbol combination for the deviation result, the player pays attention to the symbol combination because the setting suggestion information may be included when the deviation result is specified. It is supposed to be done. According to this configuration, the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention can be suitably exhibited.

The higher the player's expectations, the greater the disappointment when notified that the result is a disappointment. This is not preferable because it causes a decrease in motivation to play. In view of such circumstances, as shown in the present embodiment, it is out of the question to configure the setting suggestion in the reach display in which the symbol combination corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result may be established. It is preferable to alleviate the decrease in motivation to play in the case of.

The higher the expected reach display, which is the result of a hit, the greater the disappointment when a notification that the result is a miss is given (so-called intense heat removal). This is not preferable because it causes a decrease in motivation to play. In view of such circumstances, as shown in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the setting suggestion is executed in the super reach (super reach C) having a high degree of expectation is a game in the case where the result is out of order. It is preferable to alleviate the decrease in motivation.

The content is not limited to the description of the ninth embodiment described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the ninth embodiment, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to the ninth embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification example 1>
In the ninth embodiment, the setting suggestion is made by the final stop symbol combination, but the specific mode of the setting suggestion is arbitrary. For example, a sound effect or BGM that does not support setting suggestion and a sound effect or BGM that supports setting suggestion may be used in combination with a background image that does not support setting suggestion and a background image that supports setting suggestion. May be configured to suggest the setting by using in combination with. Further, it is also possible to provide a light emitting mode that does not correspond to the setting suggestion and a light emitting mode that corresponds to the setting suggestion as the light emitting mode of the lamp unit 26, and to make a setting suggestion by using these in combination.

<Modification 2>
In the ninth embodiment, the setting suggestion is given during the confirmation display, but the timing at which the setting suggestion is given is arbitrary. For example, in a configuration in which the player's attention is increased by starting the reach display, it is possible to suppress oversight of the setting suggestion by setting the configuration to suggest the setting after the reach display. Further, when a branch to a plurality of types of reach display occurs after the transition to the reach display, it is expected that the player's attention will be increased by this branch. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably suppress the oversight of the setting suggestion by adopting the configuration in which the setting suggestion is performed after the branch occurs.

<Modification example 3>
In the ninth embodiment described above, the setting suggestion is more likely to be executed in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode, but such preferential treatment is not essential. No. It is also possible to make the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion the same in the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode. In addition, it does not deny the configuration in which the setting suggestion is more likely to be executed in the low-frequency support mode than in the high-frequency support mode.

<Modification example 4>
There may be a difference in the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion between the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode and the high probability mode and the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode and the low probability mode. Unlike the former, the latter has a limit on the number of games that can be maintained in the high-frequency support mode. It is also possible to differentiate so that the probability of occurrence of setting suggestions is higher during the limited high-frequency support mode than during the limited high-frequency support mode.

<Modification 5>
The number of games in which setting suggestion is likely to occur and the number of games in which setting suggestion is unlikely to occur may be provided. It is also possible to individually set the number of games in which setting suggestion is likely to occur and the number of games in which setting suggestion is unlikely to occur according to the set value. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 57, in the range of the number of games executed after the big hit is in the range of 0 to 100, the occurrence probability of the setting suggestion is common to all the set values, and the number of games executed after the big hit is In the range of 101 to 150, the probability of occurrence of setting suggestion in setting 1 and setting 3 is higher than that in setting 2, and in the range of the number of games executed after the big hit is 151 to 200, setting 1 and setting It is also possible to configure the configuration in which the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion in the setting 2 is higher than that in the setting 2.

<Modification 6>
When the number of games executed after the big hit reaches a preset number of times, the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion can be increased.

<Modification 7>
In the ninth embodiment, the setting suggestion can be executed at the time of the out-of-order super reach C, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively or additionally, it is possible to configure the setting suggestion to be executed in another super reach or normal reach set to have a lower expectation than the super reach C. Incidentally, the setting suggestion may be executed by a plurality of types of reach.

<10th Embodiment>
The configuration of the present embodiment is different from that of the ninth embodiment in that the execution time of the setting suggestion is different depending on the number of subsequent pending information (number of pending information). Hereinafter, a configuration related to a change in the execution time of the setting suggestion will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58A is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the fixed display time (final stop time) of the symbol and the number of holds in the high frequency support mode. The description of the configuration common to the ninth embodiment will be omitted.

The fixed display time is shortened to 1.5 sec in the low frequency support mode and 1 sec in the high frequency support mode. That is, in the high-frequency support mode, the confirmation display time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode, so that there is a high possibility that the setting suggestion is overlooked. In the present embodiment, in both the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the execution time of the setting suggestion is extended by the number of subsequent pending information stored when the setting suggestion is executed. It has become. In the following description, the extension mode in the high frequency support mode will be described, but the same extension is performed in the low frequency support mode.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 58 (a), the stop display time of the symbol when the setting suggestion is not executed is 1 sec. On the other hand, when the number of subsequent pending information is 0, it is the same as the stop display time when the setting suggestion is not executed, and when the number of subsequent pending information is 1, it is 0. The time is longer than in the case of (for example, 1.5 sec), and when the number of subsequent pending information is 2, it is longer than in the case of 1 (for example, 2.0 sec). When the number of pending information is 3, the time is longer than the case of 2 (for example, 2.5 sec), and when the number of subsequent pending information is 4, it is longer than the case of 3. It is a long time (for example, 3.0 sec). That is, as the number of subsequent pending information increases, the execution time of the setting suggestion is extended. This makes it possible to reduce the chance of overlooking the setting suggestion.

Here, in the configuration in which the setting suggestion is performed by stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the game result, the execution time of the setting suggestion is extended before the confirmed display timing, that is, the start timing of the setting suggestion is advanced. Is not preferable. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end timing of the setting suggestion is delayed. Hereinafter, a configuration for extending the execution time of the setting suggestion will be described with reference to FIG. 58 (b).

As shown in FIG. 58 (b1), in the game times in which the setting suggestion is not executed, the game related to the subsequent hold information is performed at the timing when the confirmed display time elapses after the final stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is displayed. Move to times. As a result, the variable display of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 that have been stopped and displayed is restarted.

On the other hand, when the setting suggestion is executed, the setting suggestion may continue even after the confirmed display time has elapsed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58 (b2), the symbol staying on the effective line swings in the same direction as the scroll direction while staying on the effective line at the timing when the confirmed display time elapses (next). Predictive action of the start of the game round) is started. Then, the swing is terminated at the timing when the setting suggestion time has elapsed, and the fluctuation display is restarted.

With such a configuration, even if the setting suggestion time is extended beyond the fixed display time, it is possible to suppress a deterioration in the appearance of the symbol display.

If the execution time of the setting suggestion is short, there is a high possibility that oversight will occur. If a player who dislikes such oversight plays a game so as to earn an interval time between game times, there is a concern that the operating rate of the game machine will be significantly reduced. In this regard, as shown in this modification, if the setting suggestion time is set to be longer depending on the number of reserved information, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

The content is not limited to the description of the tenth embodiment described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the tenth embodiment, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to the tenth embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification example 1>
In the tenth embodiment, the execution time of the setting suggestion is extended according to the number of subsequent pending information in both the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. Considering that the confirmed display time is longer in the low-frequency support mode than in the high-frequency support mode, it is sufficient if the above extension is executed in the high-frequency support mode at least, and the extension in the low-frequency support mode is sufficient. The function can be omitted.

<Modification 2>
In the tenth embodiment, the increase in the number of subsequent pending information and the extension degree of the setting suggestion are fixed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The degree of extension may be increased as the number of subsequent pending information increases, or the degree of extension may be decreased as the number of subsequent pending information increases.

<Modification example 3>
In the tenth embodiment, by swinging the symbol, the time for visually confirming the symbol combination corresponding to the setting suggestion is gained, but the time for visually confirming the symbol combination corresponding to the setting suggestion is obtained. The specific composition for earning money is arbitrary. For example, each symbol that is stopped and displayed on the effective line may be changed so as to repeat enlargement / reduction slightly to gain time until the scroll display starts.

<11th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion can be executed for any of the out-of-order super reach A to the out-of-order super reach C, and the number of times the out-of-order super reach is executed without a big hit result (continuous number of times). One of the features is that the probability of occurrence of setting suggestion changes depending on the situation. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the ninth embodiment. The description of the configuration common to the ninth embodiment will be omitted. First, with reference to the floor chart of FIG. 59, the effect setting process for generating the out-of-reach in the present embodiment will be described.

(Production setting process for loss reach)
In the effect setting process for generating the out-of-reach, first, in step S2701, the process of determining the variation display mode is executed. Specifically, the current variation display mode is determined based on the variation display time information included in the variation start command received from the main control device 162. For example, normal reach A when the variable display time is "10 sec", normal reach B when the variable display time is "15 sec", super reach A when the variable display time is "16 sec", and variable display. When the time is "17 sec", it is determined to execute Super Reach B, and when the variable display time is "18 sec", it is determined to execute Super Reach C (see FIG. 32).

In the following step S2702, it is determined whether or not the current variation display mode determined in step S2701 is any of the out-of-order super reach A to the out-of-order super reach C. If a negative determination is made in step S2702, the effect setting process for generating the main loss reach is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, the process proceeds to step S2703.

In step S2703, the number of games executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is specified. In the present embodiment, the number of games is stored in the monitoring device 600, and the number of games after the end of the open / close execution mode is specified based on the number of games.

In the following step S2704, the number of judgment reference times for suggesting the setting is determined. In the present embodiment, the reference number of times for suggesting the setting changes depending on the number of games after the end of the open / close execution mode. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 60, when the number of games is 0 to 99, the judgment standard number is 20 times, when the number of games is 100 to 199, the judgment standard number is 19 times, and the game is played. When the number of times is 200 to 299, the number of judgment criteria is 18 times, when the number of games is 300 to 399, the number of judgment criteria is 17, and when the number of games is 400 to 499, the number of judgment criteria is 16 times. When the number of games is 500 to 599, the number of judgment criteria is 15 times, when the number of games is 600 to 699, the number of judgment criteria is 14, and when the number of games is 700 to 799, the number of judgment criteria is 13 times. When the number of times is 800 times or more, the number of judgment reference times is 12, and the number of judgment reference times decreases as the number of games increases.

In the following step S2705, the setting suggestion possibility determination process is executed. Specifically, the total number of executions (consecutive times) of the deviation super reach A to the deviation super reach C executed after the end of the opening / closing execution mode including the current deviation super reach is compared with the determination reference number.

If the total number of executions (consecutive times) of the out-of-order super reach A to the out-of-out super reach C has not reached the determination reference number, a negative determination is made in step S2706, and the process proceeds to step S2707. In step S2707, the final stop symbol combination determination process that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is performed. As a result, in the game round, the final stop symbol combination that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is displayed as the final stop. Since the final stop symbol combination that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is the same as that of the ninth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

If the total number of executions (consecutive times) of the out-of-order super reach A to the out-of-out super reach C has reached the determination reference number, an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, and the process proceeds to step S2708. In step S2708, the final stop symbol combination determination process corresponding to the setting suggestion is performed. As a result, in the game round, the final stop symbol combination corresponding to the setting suggestion is displayed as the final stop. Since the final stop symbol combination corresponding to the setting suggestion is the same as that of the ninth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The probability of occurrence of out-of-order super reach A to out-of-order super reach C is about 1/45. For this reason, in many cases, the number of games played after the end of the open / close execution mode exceeds 600, so that the number of reference determinations and the total number of executions (consecutive times) of the out-of-order super reach A to the out-of-order super reach C are different. In agreement, the configuration suggestion is executed.

The execution of the reach display raises expectations for the winning result. However, even if the reach display is executed, it does not necessarily result in a hit result, and may result in a miss result. The continuation of such an event (reach display → deviation result) becomes a factor that lowers the player's willingness to play. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the suggestion of the set value (setting suggestion) is executed based on the number of times the deviation result is notified via the reach display. Therefore, even if the reach display is unexploded, it is possible to give the player the impression that the setting suggestion is approaching, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Reach display → When the result is off, the larger the number, the easier it is to execute the setting suggestion. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play even when the normal gaming state continues.

In a configuration in which the expectation of setting suggestion is increased due to the result of reach display → deviation, the player's motivation to play may decrease as the game progresses without executing the reach display. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if the number of games executed after the open / close execution mode increases, the threshold for suggesting the setting becomes lower, the decrease in the motivation for the game when the reach display does not occur is alleviated. can.

The content is not limited to the description of the eleventh embodiment described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the eleventh embodiment, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to the eleventh embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification example 1>
In the eleventh embodiment, the setting suggestion is more likely to be executed as the number of games after the open / close execution mode increases, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a setting suggestion high probability zone may be provided in which the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion increases over a predetermined number of game times after the high frequency support mode ends.

<Modification 2>
In the eleventh embodiment, the cumulative number of times of the detached super reach A to the detached super reach C is reset by shifting to the open / close execution mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting is suggested based on the cumulative number of times of the out-of-order super reach A to the out-of-order super reach C executed after the power is turned on or when the setting is changed. In this case, it is preferable that the determination reference number of times is also reset when the power is turned on or when the setting is changed.

<Modification example 3>
In the eleventh embodiment described above, the possibility of suggesting the setting is determined based on the total number of executions (number of consecutive times) of the out-of-order super reach A to the out-of-order super reach C. It is also possible to determine whether or not the setting suggestion is possible based on the total number of executions of the out-of-order normal reach B and the out-of-order super reach A to the out-of-order super reach C.

<Modification example 4>
It is also possible to have a configuration in which the probability of occurrence of the out-of-order super reach A to the out-of-order super reach C differs depending on the set value. For example, the probability of occurrence of the out-of-order super reach A to the out-of-order super reach C may be increased in the order of setting 3 <setting 2 <setting 1.

<Modification 5>
In the eleventh embodiment described above, the judgment reference number of times table (FIG. 60) for determining whether or not the setting suggestion can be executed is common for each of the setting values of settings 1 to 3, but the present invention is not limited to this. No. The determination reference count table for setting 1, the determination reference count table for setting 2, and the determination reference count table for setting 3 may be provided separately. In this case, for example, the number of determination reference times may be reduced in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3, and a difference may be provided so that the setting value that is more advantageous to the player lowers the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion.

<12th Embodiment>
In the pachinko machine 10 having a setting changing function, if the set value can be detected, it is possible to take advantage of it. For example, if the set value is disadvantageous to the player, it moves to another gaming machine at an early stage, and if the set value is advantageous to the player, the game is played for as long as possible on the gaming machine to make the game advantageous. You can proceed. In such a configuration, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be expected by suggesting the setting, but if the set value is stored in a control device other than the main control device 162, it is mainly. There is concern that those other control devices, which have a lower security function than the control device 162, are likely to be targeted as targets for illegal acquisition of set values. In this embodiment, in view of such circumstances, the control device on the sub side does not always grasp the setting information, and the main control device 162 controls whether or not the setting suggestion is possible. The security function is being strengthened. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 61, the variation display time setting process executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described. The variation display time setting process is a process executed as a part of the variation start process (see FIG. 26).

(Variable display time setting process)
In the variable display time setting process, first, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the current game times correspond to the jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, the process proceeds to step S2802, and the variation display time is determined with reference to the jackpot variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403. After executing the determination process of step S2802, the process proceeds to step S2803, and the variation display time of the current game is set in the variation display time counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 to perform the setting process of the variation display time. finish.

Returning to the description of step S2801, if a negative determination is made in step S2801, the process proceeds to step S2804. In step S2804, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the occurrence of reach. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2804, the process proceeds to step S2805. In step S2805, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to super reach. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805, the process proceeds to step S2806.

In step S2806, the variation display time is determined with reference to the variation display time table for deviation superreach stored in the variation display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403. After executing the determination process of step S2806, the process proceeds to step S2803, and the variation display time of the current game is set in the variation display time counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404, and the setting process of the variation display time is performed. finish.

Returning to the description of step S2805, if a negative determination is made in step S2805, that is, if the current game times do not correspond to super reach, the process proceeds to step S2807. In step S2807, the variation display time is determined with reference to the deviation display time table for normal reach stored in the variation display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403. After executing the determination process of step S2807, the process proceeds to step S2803, and the variation display time of the current game is set in the variation display time counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404, and the setting process of the variation display time is performed. finish.

Returning to the description of step S2804, if a negative determination is made in step S2804, that is, if the game times this time correspond to complete deviation, the process proceeds to step S2808. In step S2808, the variation display time is determined with reference to the variation display time table for complete deviation stored in the variation display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403. After executing the determination process of step S2808, the process proceeds to step S2803, and the variation display time of the current game is set in the variation display time counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 to set the variation display time. finish.

The information indicating the fluctuation display time determined in steps S2802, S2806, S2807, and S2808 is included in the fluctuation start command output to the notification / effect control device 140. The notification / effect control device 140 is configured to specify the fluctuation display time from this fluctuation start command.

In the present embodiment, the variable display time may differ for each set value for a part of the out-of-order super reach. Here, the relationship between the set value and the variable display time will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 62.

When the game times this time correspond to complete deviation, the fluctuation display time set by the main control device 162 is any of 3 sec, 4 sec, 6 sec, and 8 sec at any set value. In the notification / effect control device 140, when the fluctuation display time specified by the main control device 162 is any of 3 sec, 4 sec, 6 sec, and 8 sec, complete deviation is set as the fluctuation display mode. Although the details of the variable display time depend on the number of subsequent pending information, there is no difference in the selection probability depending on the set value. Therefore, in the notification / effect control device 140, it is impossible to specify which set value is set from the fluctuation display time specified in the game times corresponding to the complete deviation.

When the game times this time correspond to the normal reach A, the variable display time to be set is 10 sec at any set value. In the notification / effect control device 140, when the fluctuation display time specified by the main control device 162 is 10 sec, the normal reach A is set as the fluctuation display mode. Since the variation display time is not different depending on the set value, the notification / effect control device 140 specifies which set value is from the variation display time specified in the game times corresponding to the normal reach A. That is not possible.

When the game times this time correspond to the normal reach B, the variable display time to be set is 15 sec at any set value. In the notification / effect control device 140, when the fluctuation display time specified by the main control device 162 is 15 sec, the normal reach B is set as the fluctuation display mode. Since the variation display time is not different depending on the set value, the notification / effect control device 140 specifies which set value is from the variation display time specified in the game times corresponding to the normal reach B. That is not possible.

When the game times this time correspond to Super Reach A, the variable display time to be set is 16 sec at any set value. In the notification / effect control device 140, when the fluctuation display time specified by the main control device 162 is 15 sec, the super reach A is set as the fluctuation display mode. Since there is no difference in the variable display time depending on the set value, in the notification / effect control device 140, which set value is set from the variable display time specified in the game times corresponding to the hit super reach A. It is impossible to identify.

When the game times this time are out of order and correspond to Super Reach A, the variable display time to be set is 16 sec or 16.2 sec at any set value. In the notification / effect control device 140, when the fluctuation display time specified by the main control device 162 is 16 sec or 16.2 sec, super reach A is set as the fluctuation display mode. However, when the variable display time is 16 sec, the setting suggestion is not executed, and when the variable display time is 16.2 sec, the setting suggestion is executed. The final stop symbol combination is also used for the setting suggestion in this embodiment. The details will be described later, but in Super Reach A, which is out of correspondence with the setting suggestion, the corresponding special symbol combination will be finally stopped and displayed.

Regarding these fluctuation display times, a difference is provided in the distribution probability for each set value. Specifically, in the case of setting 1, the distribution probability of 16 sec is 99.8%, and the distribution probability of 16.2 sec is 0.2%. In the case of setting 2, the distribution probability of 16 sec is 99.8%, and the distribution probability of 16.2 sec is 0.2%. In the case of setting 3, the distribution probability of 16 sec is 99.9%, and the distribution probability of 16.2 sec is 0.1%. Therefore, the probability that the above-mentioned special symbol combination corresponding to the setting suggestion is displayed differs depending on the set value. That is, the more the special symbol combination is displayed, the higher the expectation of setting 1 or setting 2.

When the game times this time correspond to Super Reach B, the variable display time to be set is 17 sec at any set value. In the notification / effect control device 140, when the fluctuation display time specified by the main control device 162 is 17 seconds, the super reach B is set as the fluctuation display mode. Since there is no difference in the variable display time depending on the set value, in the notification / effect control device 140, which set value is set from the variable display time specified in the game times corresponding to the hit super reach B. It is impossible to identify.

When the game times this time are out of order and correspond to Super Reach B, the variable display time to be set is 17 sec or 17.2 sec in the setting 1 and the setting 2, and 17 sec in the setting 3. In the notification / effect control device 140, when the fluctuation display time specified by the main control device 162 is 17 sec or 17.2 sec, super reach B is set as the fluctuation display mode. However, when the variable display time is 17 sec, the setting suggestion is not executed, and when the variable display time is 17.2 sec, the setting suggestion is executed. The final stop symbol combination is also used for the setting suggestion in this embodiment. The details will be described later, but in Super Reach B, which is out of correspondence with the setting suggestion, the corresponding special symbol combination will be finally stopped and displayed.

Regarding these fluctuation display times, a difference is provided in the distribution probability for each set value. Specifically, in the case of setting 1, the distribution probability of 17 sec is 99.8%, and the distribution probability of 17.2 sec is 0.2%. In the case of setting 2, the distribution probability of 17 sec is 99.8%, and the distribution probability of 17.2 sec is 0.2%. In the case of setting 3, the distribution probability of 17 sec is 100%, and the distribution probability of 17.2 sec is 0%. Therefore, the probability that the above-mentioned special symbol combination corresponding to the setting suggestion is displayed differs depending on the set value. That is, when the special symbol combination is displayed, it is denied that the setting is 3, and it is confirmed that the setting is either the setting 1 or the setting 2.

When the game times this time are hit and correspond to Super Reach C, the variable display time to be set is 18 sec at any set value. In the notification / effect control device 140, when the fluctuation display time specified by the main control device 162 is 18 seconds, the super reach C is set as the fluctuation display mode. Since there is no difference in the variable display time depending on the set value, in the notification / effect control device 140, which set value is set from the variable display time specified in the game times corresponding to the hit super reach C. It is impossible to identify.

When the game times this time are out of order and correspond to Super Reach C, the variable display time to be set is 18 sec or 18.2 sec in the setting 1 and the setting 2, and 18 sec in the setting 3. In the notification / effect control device 140, when the fluctuation display time specified by the main control device 162 is 18 sec or 18.2 sec, super reach C is set as the fluctuation display mode. However, when the variable display time is 18 sec, the setting suggestion is not executed, and when the variable display time is 18.2 sec, the setting suggestion is executed. The final stop symbol combination is also used for the setting suggestion in this embodiment. The details will be described later, but in Super Reach C, which is out of correspondence with the setting suggestion, the corresponding special symbol combination will be finally stopped and displayed.

Regarding these fluctuation display times, a difference is provided in the distribution probability for each set value. Specifically, in the case of setting 1, the distribution probability of 18 sec is 99.6%, and the distribution probability of 18.2 sec is 0.4%. In the case of setting 2, the distribution probability of 18 sec is 99.9%, and the distribution probability of 18.2 sec is 0.1%. In the case of setting 3, the distribution probability of 18 sec is 100%, and the distribution probability of 18.2 sec is 0%. Therefore, the probability that the above-mentioned special symbol combination corresponding to the setting suggestion is displayed differs depending on the set value. That is, when the special symbol combination is displayed, it is denied that the setting is 3, and it is confirmed that the setting is either the setting 1 or the setting 2. Further, when the special symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the expectation that it is the most advantageous setting 1 for the player is high.

In the following description, various fluctuation display times (16.2 sec, 17.2 sec, 18.2 sec) corresponding to the setting suggestion are referred to as special fluctuation display times.

Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63, the effect setting process (step S1205 of FIG. 31) for generating the disengagement reach, which is executed by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140, will be described. The effect setting process for generating the out-of-reach is a process executed as a part of the periodic process by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140.

(Production setting process for loss reach)
In the effect setting process for generating the out-of-reach, first, in step S2901, the process of determining the variation display mode is executed. Specifically, the outline of the effect mode is specified based on the fluctuation display time specified by the main control device 162, and the details of the effect mode (for example, the presence / absence of the occurrence of effects, cut-ins, etc.) are determined. After determining the variation display mode, the final stop symbol is determined in steps S2902 to S2905.

Specifically, first, in step S2902, it is determined whether or not the variation display mode of the game times this time is out of alignment and corresponds to super reach. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, the process proceeds to step S2903. In step S2903, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the above-mentioned special variation display time.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps S2902 and S2903, the process proceeds to step S2904. In step S2904, the final stop symbol combination determination process that does not correspond to the setting suggestion is executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2903, the process proceeds to step S2905. In step S2905, the final stop symbol combination determination process corresponding to the setting suggestion is executed.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 64, the final stop symbol combination corresponding to the deviation result will be supplementarily described.

When 16 sec is specified as the variable display time in the game times corresponding to the deviation result, the deviation super reach A is executed. In this case, as the final stop symbol combination, a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result and a symbol combination other than the above special symbol combination are set as the final stop symbol combination. On the other hand, when 16.2 sec is specified as the variable display time, Super Reach A is also executed. In this case, as the final stop symbol combination, the "7" symbol constituting the upper symbol row Z1, the "3" symbol constituting the middle symbol row Z2, and the "7" symbol constituting the lower symbol row Z3 are set on the effective line. (1st special symbol combination). As described above, the probability that 16.2 sec is set as the variable display time is set so that the latter is twice as large as the former when the setting 3 is compared with the setting 1 and the setting 2. Therefore, when the first special symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed, the setting 1 or the setting 2 becomes rich (see FIG. 65).

When 17 sec is specified as the variable display time in the game times corresponding to the deviation result, the deviation super reach B is executed. In this case, as the final stop symbol combination, a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result and a symbol combination other than the above special symbol combination are set as the final stop symbol combination. On the other hand, when 17.2 sec is specified as the variable display time, Super Reach B is also executed. In this case, as the final stop symbol combination, the "7" symbol constituting the upper symbol row Z1, the "4" symbol constituting the middle symbol row Z2, and the "7" symbol constituting the lower symbol row Z3 are set on the effective line. (Second special symbol combination). As described above, the probability that 17.2 sec is set as the variable display time is 0% in setting 3. Therefore, when the second special symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed, the setting 3 is denied, and it is confirmed that the setting 1 or the setting 2 is set (see FIG. 65).

When 18 sec is specified as the variable display time in the game times corresponding to the deviation result, the deviation super reach C is executed. In this case, as the final stop symbol combination, a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result and a symbol combination other than the above special symbol combination are set as the final stop symbol combination. When 18.2 sec is specified as the variable display time, Super Reach C is also executed. In this case, as the final stop symbol combination, the "7" symbol constituting the upper symbol row Z1, the "2" symbol constituting the middle symbol row Z2, and the "7" symbol constituting the lower symbol row Z3 on the effective line ( The third special symbol combination) is set. As described above, the probability that 18.2 sec is set as the variable display time is 0% in setting 3. Therefore, when the second special symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed, the setting 3 is denied, and it is confirmed that the setting 1 or the setting 2 is set (see FIG. 65). When 18.1 sec is specified as the variable display time, Super Reach C is also executed. In this case, as the final stop symbol combination, the "7" symbol constituting the upper symbol row Z1, the "1" symbol constituting the middle symbol row Z2, and the "7" symbol constituting the lower symbol row Z3 on the effective line ( The fourth special symbol combination) is set. As described above, the probability that 18.1 sec is set as the variable display time is 0% in setting 2 and setting 3. Therefore, when the fourth special symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed, it is confirmed that the setting is 1 (see FIG. 65).

After executing the processes of steps S2904 and S2905 in the effect setting process for generating the out-of-reach, the variation display time information received from the main control device 162 is deleted. Then, at the timing when the game round ends, the information or the like indicating the current set value is deleted.

According to the twelfth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The variation display time information transmitted from the main control device 162 with the start of the game round includes information indicating a set value. According to this configuration, the main control device 162 can instruct whether or not to suggest the set value (setting suggestion), and the notification / effect control device 140 having a lower defense function than the main control device 162 is illegally operated. It is possible to prevent the setting suggestion from being executed illegally.

Further, since the fluctuation display time information transmitted from the main control device 162 serves as the base for suggesting the setting, it is not necessary for the notification / effect control device 140 to store and hold the information indicating the set value. It is advantageous to have a configuration in which it is not necessary to store the set value in the notification / effect control device 140 having a low defense function in order to suppress the outflow of information indicating the set value.

Furthermore, since the variable display time information that can be expected to be transmitted from the main control device 162 on a regular basis also serves as information indicating the set value, compared with a configuration in which the information indicating the set value is separately transmitted, It is possible to make it difficult to aim at the information and illegally acquire the information.

When the variation display time information indicating the special variation display time is received from the main control device 162, the suggestion is executed in the game times executed at the special variation display time. In such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally read the set value from the notification / effect control device 140 as compared with the configuration in which the suggestion is carried over to the later game times.

Since the variation display mode related to the normal variation display time and the variation display mode related to the special variation display time are common, it becomes difficult to specify the set value from the difference in appearance and the like of the variation display mode.

In addition, since the difference is provided so that the special variation display time is slightly longer, it becomes easier to earn the execution period of the setting suggestion in the configuration in which the setting suggestion is executed only in the corresponding game times.

When Super Reach A to C is executed, it is not preferable that the set value is estimated from a slight difference in period. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if the difference is limited to the extent that the normal fluctuation display time and the special fluctuation display time are recognized as the same, it is preferable that such an inconvenience occurs. Can be suppressed.

By counting the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 253, it is possible to specify the presence or absence of setting suggestion. However, as shown in the present embodiment, if the beginning of the variable display is made common, it is possible to make it difficult to count the execution period aiming at the game times in which the setting suggestion may occur.

The variable display time is longer for the super reach, which is the basis of the setting suggestion, than for the normal reach. By setting the special fluctuation display time based on the super reach, which has a relatively long fluctuation display time, it is difficult to visually identify the difference between the normal fluctuation display time and the special fluctuation display time. can.

When the reach display is executed, the expectation for the hit result is increased, so that the player's attention is likely to be directed to the reach display. By executing the setting suggestion in a situation where the player's attention is high, it is possible to reduce the chance that the setting suggestion is overlooked.

The content is not limited to the description of the twelfth embodiment described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the twelfth embodiment, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to the twelfth embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

<Modification example 1>
In the twelfth embodiment, when the special variation display time is specified from the main control device 162, the setting suggestion is executed at the corresponding game times, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, if the subsequent hold information exists when the special variation display time is received, it is possible to configure the setting suggestion to be executed at any of the game times related to the subsequent hold information. be. For example, if all of the subsequent pending information is targeted for setting suggestion, the more pending information stored, the greater the chance (execution time) of execution of the setting suggestion. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player who expects the setting suggestion to actively participate in the game.

<Modification 2>
In the twelfth embodiment, the main control device 162 determines the presence or absence of the setting suggestion, but the final decision right may be entrusted to the notification / effect control device 140. For example, when a predetermined regulation condition is satisfied, even if the special variation display time is specified, it is possible to restrict the stoppage of the special symbol combination corresponding to the setting suggestion.

In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, for the symbol combination stopped and displayed in the final gaming round, the next gaming round starts except when the display screen is turned off or the demo screen is displayed in the power saving mode or the like. Is maintained until. In such a configuration, even if the special variation display time is specified, if the subsequent hold information is not stored, the stop of the special symbol combination is restricted and the special symbol combination is replaced. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the normal combination of out-of-design symbols is stopped.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or may be partially or wholly applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball launched to the right route in the game area PE is configured to avoid entering the upper operating port 83a, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to allow the game ball launched on the right route to enter the upper operating port 83a.

(2) The game may be performed in parallel with the game times based on the ball entering the upper operating port 83a and the game times based on the ball entering the lower operating port 83b. For example, when the hold information based on the ball entering the upper operating port 83a and the holding information based on the ball entering the lower operating port 83b coexist, the symbol corresponding to the holding information related to the upper operating port 83a is displayed. A variable display area and a variable display area of a symbol corresponding to the hold information related to the lower operating port 83b are formed in the display screen 253a, respectively, and both variable display areas are displayed in parallel in each of the variable display areas. good.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information related to the upper operating port 83a (corresponding to the “ball entry part”) and the hold information related to the lower operating port 83b (corresponding to the “ball entry part”) are sequentially (corresponding to the “ball entry part”). It was configured to digest (alternately), and more specifically, it was configured to digest in the order in which the balls entered. It is also possible to change this as follows. That is, it is also possible to preferentially digest either the hold information related to the upper operating port 83a or the holding information related to the lower operating port 83b. For example, when a difference in advantage is set between the lottery related to the upper operating port 83a (hold information) and the lottery related to the lower operating port 83b, the operating port set to be advantageous to the player is used. It is also possible to preferentially digest the pending information.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b are provided as the "ball entry portion", but the number of operating ports does not necessarily have to be a plurality, but one. May be good.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 are separately provided, but one control device that integrates the functions of the respective control devices 140 and 410 may be provided. ..

(5) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the monitoring device 600 is provided separately from the main control device 162, but the main control device 162 may have the function of the monitoring device 600.

(6) It is arbitrary whether the information stored in the RAM 404 or the like of the main control device 162 is erased (reset) or not erased by the setting change operation.

(7) In a situation where the gaming machine is in a standby state (non-operating state), the setting suggestion may be executed when the player touches the gaming ball launching handle 41. As a condition for executing the setting suggestion, when the elapsed time (non-operating time) in the standby state exceeds the predetermined time, it is compared with the case where the predetermined time is not exceeded. Therefore, the configuration may be such that the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion is high.

(8) When the gaming machine is in the standby state (non-operating state), the setting may be suggested every time a preset time elapses. For example, if the symbol combination corresponding to the setting suggestion shifts to the standby state while the stop display is displayed, the demo screen temporarily shifts to the game screen (screen where the symbol combination can be confirmed) after the above time elapses. It is good to have a configuration.

(9) The setting suggestion may be executed by the image displayed at the ending of the jackpot.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, the setting is suggested by the symbol combination displayed at the final stop corresponding to the deviation result, but the setting is not limited to this, and the final stop is performed according to the jackpot result. It may be configured to suggest the setting according to the displayed symbol combination.

(11) When the number of holdings related to the operating port 83a has reached the upper limit and a prize is further generated in the operating port 83a, the final stop symbol combination corresponding to the game being executed is set and the suggestion is supported. It may be configured to be rewritten as something to be used.

(12) A configuration having a time specifying means such as a real-time clock may be used, and the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion may be changed depending on the time zone.

(13) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines that generate a right when a ball enters and become a big hit, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arrange ball machines, and game machines such as sparrow balls.

In addition, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. The present invention also applies to a slot machine that gives a player a privilege such as paying out a medal when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from a display window after the reel is stopped. Can be applied.

Further, the gaming machine body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
The following feature A group is described as follows: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a pattern display device for variablely displaying a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. A lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a variable display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won. Regarding the background technology that a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1), "In recent years, the operation of the gaming machine Various measures have been taken to improve reliability. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to improve reliability. " Is.

Features A1. A storage means (RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing information about the game, and
Starting ball entry portions (operating ports 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE), and
It is provided with an information acquisition means (a function of acquiring hold information by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit.
The storage means has an acquisition information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means.
A determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 performs a win / fail determination process or the like) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). It is a gaming machine that has a function to execute)
A set value determination means (lottery by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided with a plurality of stages (setting 1 to setting 3) of set values corresponding to the expected value of the game ball, and one set value is determined from the set values. Function to switch tables) and
The set value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means, and
When the set value is changed by the set value changing means, the erasing means for erasing the information stored in the storage means and the erasing means.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a change regulating means (setting change regulating function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that regulates the change based on the operation of the set value changing means according to a game situation.

If the information about the game is suddenly deleted during the game, it is assumed that the behavior of the game machine suddenly changes. For example, if a game ball that would otherwise be paid out to a player is no longer paid out, or if the game times related to the acquired special information are not executed, the player is confused and the game machine. It is feared that it will be a factor that reduces the reliability of the pachinko machine. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, since the change of the set value (setting change) is regulated according to the game situation, it is possible to suppress the change in the behavior of the gaming machine during the game. This can contribute to the improvement of reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature A2. Starting ball entry portions (operating ports 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE), and
Information acquisition means (function of acquiring hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit, and
An acquisition information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 performs a win / fail determination process or the like) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). It is a gaming machine that has a function to execute)
A set value determination means (lottery by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided with a plurality of stages (setting 1 to setting 3) of set values corresponding to the expected value of the game ball, and one set value is determined from the set values. Function to switch tables) and
The set value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means, and
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a change regulating means (setting change regulating function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that regulates the change based on the operation of the set value changing means according to a gaming situation.

If the set value is changed during the game, the behavior of the gaming machine suddenly changes, which causes confusion for the player. In this regard, if the configuration is such that the change of the set value (setting change) is regulated based on the game situation as shown in this feature, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed. This is preferable in order to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature A3. A game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) for launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player is provided.
The change regulating means regulates the change when the gaming ball launching operation is performed by the gaming ball launching means, and the regulation is continued until the first predetermined period elapses after the launching operation is completed. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, characterized in that it has a means for causing the game.

It takes a certain period of time from the end of the launching operation of the game ball to the discharge of the game ball from the game area. Therefore, instead of immediately releasing the regulation when the firing operation of the game ball is completed, the regulation is continued until the first predetermined period elapses, so that the game ball remains in the game area. It is possible to suppress the change of the set value.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "provided with a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation, and the change regulating means is the game ball launching means. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, which has means for restricting the change from the end of the launching operation of the gaming ball to the elapse of the first predetermined period. " Is also possible.

Feature A4. The first predetermined period is set to be longer than the required period required for the game ball launched by the game ball launching means to reach the game area and be discharged from the game area. Characteristic The gaming machine according to feature A3.

As shown in feature A4, it is preferable that the set value is changed while the game ball is flowing down the game area by making the first predetermined period longer than the required period required for discharging the game ball. Can be suppressed.

Feature A5. A storage unit (for example, upper plate 33 and lower plate 34) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and capable of storing game balls, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out the game ball to the storage unit based on the payout request.
The change regulating means is a means for regulating the change when the payout operation of the game ball is performed by the payout means, and continuing the regulation until the second predetermined period elapses after the payout operation is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A4, which is characterized by having.

When a payout request is made due to a ball entering the ball entry section or the like, a certain time lag occurs from the entry of the ball to the withdrawal. If the set value is changed during this period, it becomes unclear which set value the current payout corresponds to. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by continuing the regulation until the second predetermined period elapses even after the payout operation is completed.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "a storage unit (for example, upper plate 33 and lower plate 34) provided on the front portion (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine and capable of storing game balls, and the storage portion based on the payout request. A payout means (payout device 224) for paying out the game ball to the unit is provided, and the change regulating means regulates the change until a second predetermined period elapses after the payout operation of the game ball by the payout means is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A4, which is characterized by having a means for the game.

Feature A6. A guide passage for guiding the game ball paid out by the payout means to the storage unit is provided.
The game according to feature A5, wherein the second predetermined period is set to be longer than the required period required for the game ball to reach the storage unit from the payout means through the guide passage. Machine.

As shown in the feature A6, by making the second predetermined period longer than the required period until the game ball reaches the player's hand, it is possible to preferably suppress the change of the set value during the payout.

Feature A7. A storage unit (for example, upper plate 33 and lower plate 34) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and capable of storing game balls, and
A payout means (payout device 224) for sequentially paying out game balls to the storage unit based on a payout request is provided.
When there is a game ball that is refraining from being paid out by the payout means, the change regulating means has a means for restricting the change at least until the payout of the game ball is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A6.

In a gaming machine, it may be difficult to immediately pay out the gaming balls due to factors such as a shortage of gaming balls. In such a situation, the payout operation may be temporarily interrupted, but the payout operation is restarted when the payout becomes possible. In such a case, by restricting the change of the set value at least until the payout is completed, it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to know which set value the paid out game ball corresponds to.

Feature A8. A detection means for detecting the entry of a ball into the entry portion provided in the game area is provided.
When the ball entry is detected by the detection means, the change regulating means has a means for regulating the change until a third predetermined period elapses from the detection. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A7.

According to the feature A8, when a ball enters the ball entry portion, a game rotation effect, a game ball payout, or the like is executed based on the ball entry. Therefore, when a ball enters the ball entry section, by restricting the change of the set value from the detection of the ball entry until the third predetermined period elapses, the game rotation effect and the game ball payout can be performed. It can be suitably suppressed that it is unclear which set value corresponds to.

The "ball entry portion" shown in this feature may be the same as or different from the "starting ball entry portion" shown in feature A1.

Feature A9. Described in any one of the feature A1 to the feature A8, wherein the change regulating means has a means for regulating the change when the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Game machine.

According to the feature A9, the setting change is restricted when the special information is stored. As a result, for example, regarding special information that normally corresponds to predetermined judgment information (for example, winning information), a judgment result that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information may be obtained, or special information that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information may be obtained. It is possible to preferably suppress that the determination result corresponds to the predetermined determination information.

Feature A10. The information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the determination target by the determination means is before the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the determination. The destination identification means to be specified at the timing,
The game according to feature A9, wherein the predetermined special information includes a suggestion means for suggesting a pre-specific result by the pre-identification means at a timing before the determination is made. Machine.

For example, in a situation where special information that is a judgment result corresponding to predetermined judgment information is reserved, a setting change occurs while suggesting it, and the special information does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information. When it comes to the judgment result, the content of the suggestion and the judgment result related to the special information may be inconsistent. In the configuration in which the determination result related to the special information is suggested in advance, the content of the suggestion and the actual determination result may be inconsistent, which may give the player a sense of distrust. In this respect, according to the combination with the configuration in which the setting change is restricted when the special information is stored as shown in the feature A9, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned contradiction and the like. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature A11. A specific means for specifying the number of game balls supplied to the game area and the number of game balls discharged from the game area is provided.
The change regulating means has a means for regulating the change when the number of game balls specified by the specific means is a number corresponding to the number of game balls remaining in the game area. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A10, which is characterized by being present.

According to the feature A11, the setting change is restricted in the situation where the game ball remains in the game area. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game ball that should have been launched under a certain set value from entering the ball entry portion or the like under a different set value.

Feature A12. A door body that can be opened and closed (inner frame 13) and
An operation unit (setting change switch 166) that is arranged at a position that can be operated by opening the door body and is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means.
A position detecting means (opening detection sensor 706) for detecting the opening of the door body is provided.
The change regulating means has a means for regulating the change when it is detected by the position detecting means that the door body is arranged at a closed position. The gaming machine according to any one of A11.

According to the feature A12, it is necessary to open the door body when changing the setting. Since such an act is conspicuous, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally changing the set value and contribute to the improvement of the crime prevention function of the gaming machine.

Feature A13. It is provided separately from the main control means (main control device 162) having the information acquisition means, the acquisition information storage means, and the determination means, and the game status is determined based on the game information input from the main control means. Equipped with a game status monitoring means (monitoring device 600) to be monitored
The game status monitoring means has a game information storage means (storage unit 604) that stores game information from the main control means in association with the set value set by the main control means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A12.

For example, if there may be a time lag between the timing at which special information is acquired and the timing at which it is stored in the game information storage means, there is a possibility that the corresponding settings may differ due to the setting change. In this regard, by applying the technical idea shown in the feature A1 or the like to the configuration shown in the present feature, the influence of such a timing shift can be suitably suppressed.

<Characteristic B group>
The following feature B group is described as follows: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a pattern display device for variablely displaying a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. With the winning of the operating port as an opportunity, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a variable display of the pattern is started. Regarding the background technology that a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1), "In recent years, the operation of the gaming machine Various measures have been taken to improve reliability. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to improve reliability. " Is.

Feature B1. A main control means (main control device 162) that outputs payout command information (prize ball command) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (for example, a general winning opening 81) provided in the game area (game area PE).
In a gaming machine provided with a payout control means (payout control device 242) that controls a payout means (payout device 224) so that a game ball is paid out based on the input of the payout command information.
The main control means
A setting value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided with a plurality of stages (setting 1 to setting 3) of setting values corresponding to the expected acquisition value of the game ball, and one setting value is determined from the setting values. Function to execute change processing) and
It has a set value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means.
A gaming machine characterized in that the payout command information output from the main control means includes specific information (code) indicating a set value determined by the set value determining means.

According to the feature B1, the payout command information output from the main control means includes information indicating a set value determined by the main control means. In the payout control means, the set value set by the main control means can be specified from the payout command information (specifically, specific information). In this way, by sharing the set value between the main control means and the payout control means, the cooperation between the two control means can be strengthened. Since the payout command information is information that is frequently output to the payout control means as the game progresses, the set value can be confirmed by adding information indicating the set value to such existing payout command information. Opportunities can be increased. This is a preferable configuration for improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is the main control for outputting the payout command information (prize ball command) based on the entry into the ball entry unit (for example, the general winning opening 81) provided in the game area (game area PE). A means (main control device 162) and a payout control means (payout control device 242) for controlling the payout means (payout device 224) so that the game ball is paid out based on the input of the payout command information. In the gaming machine, the setting value determining means (main control device 162) is provided with a plurality of stages (settings 1 to 3) of setting values corresponding to the expected acquisition values of the gaming balls, and one of the setting values is determined. (Function to execute the setting change process in the MPU 402) and the setting value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determining means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the payout command information output from the main control means includes information corresponding to the set value determined by the set value determining means. " It is possible.

Feature B2. When the set value is changed by the set value changing means, the main control means pays out set value information (a code included in the setting change command) indicating the set value determined by the set value determining means. It has a means to output to the control means,
The payout control means
A set value information storage means for storing the set value information input with the change of the set value, and a setting value information storage means.
Whether or not the payout command information is normal when the payout command information is input is based on the specific information included in the payout command information and the set value information stored in the set value information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that it has information determining means for determining (a function of executing comparison processing in the MPU of the payout control device 242).

According to the configuration shown in the feature B2, when the setting is changed, the set value information corresponding to the set value determined by the set value determining means is input to the payout control means, and the payout control means uses this set value. Memorize information. After that, when the payout command information is input from the main control means, does the set value specified from the payout command information (specific information) correspond to the set value stored at the time of setting change (for example, they match). Whether or not it is determined. As a result, even if a fraudulent act such as replacing the main control means with an fraudulent one is performed, it is possible to detect it.

Feature B3. When the determination result by the information determination means is normal, the payout control means pays out the game ball based on the payout command information, and the determination result by the information determination means is not normal. The gaming machine according to feature B2, characterized in that it has a means for restricting the payout of the game ball based on the payout command information when the determination result is the result.

If the set value stored in advance and the set value specified this time do not match, the payout of the game ball will be avoided as an abnormality occurs. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally acquire a game ball and strengthen the crime prevention function of the game machine.

Feature B4. When the payout command information is input in a situation where the set value information is not stored in the set value information storage means, the payout control means pays out the game ball based on the payout command information. The gaming machine according to feature B2 or feature B3, which comprises means for regulating.

In a configuration in which whether or not to pay out the game ball is determined based on the comparison result of the set value, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act such as clearing the set value information is performed. In such a case, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by configuring the configuration in which the payout of the game ball is regulated even if the payout command information is input.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B4, wherein the main control means is configured to prioritize the output of the set value information over the output of the payout command information.

In a configuration in which whether or not to pay out is determined by comparing the set values, by giving priority to the set value information when the setting is changed, it is determined that the payout command information is abnormal even though it is normal. It can be avoided. Thereby, the reliability of the gaming machine can be suitably improved.

Feature B6. The payout control means
When the information determination means determines that the payout command information is normal, the first storage means for storing the information on the number of payouts of the game balls corresponding to the payout command information as the payout number information.
A payout drive control means that drives and controls the payout means in order to pay out the number of game media corresponding to the payout number information stored in the first storage means.
Have,
If it is determined by the information determination means that it is not normal, the game balls are paid out for those stored in the first storage means, and the payout command information subject to the determination is paid out. The gaming machine according to any one of feature B2 to feature B5, which is characterized in that it is configured to regulate payout.

There is a certain time lag between the time when the payout command information is input to the payout control means and the time when the payout is actually made. Such a time lag becomes large when the payout of the game ball is not catching up, such as when the payout command information is continuously input. Here, if it is confirmed that an abnormality has occurred based on the set value, the withdrawal has already been decided, and while the withdrawal is continued, the new withdrawal command information determined to be abnormal Withdrawals are regulated. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of inconveniences such as the player not being able to receive even the payout that the player should have originally obtained due to the enhancement of the crime prevention function and the like.

Feature B7. The payout control means
When the information determination means determines that the payout command information is normal, the first storage means for storing the information on the number of payouts of the game balls corresponding to the payout command information as the payout number information.
A payout drive control means that drives and controls the payout means in order to pay out the number of game media corresponding to the payout number information stored in the first storage means.
When the payout command information is determined to be abnormal by the information determination means, a second storage means for storing information on the number of game balls to be paid out corresponding to the payout command information, and
In a situation where the information on the number of payouts of the game balls is stored in the second storage means, when the information determination means determines that the payout command information is normal, the second storage means stores the information. The gaming machine according to any one of feature B2 to feature B6, which comprises an information transfer means for transferring stored information on the number of payouts to the first storage means.

According to the feature B7, when it is determined that the payout command information is abnormal, the payout of the game ball based on the payout command information is reserved, and when it is determined that the subsequent payout command information is normal, the payout is reserved. Will be released. For example, since it cannot be denied that the above abnormality may occur accidentally due to the mixing of noise or the like, it is reserved when it is confirmed in the subsequent payout command information that there is no abnormality as shown in this feature. By paying out, it is possible to preferably suppress the player from suffering a disadvantage due to the enhancement of the crime prevention function and the like.

Feature B8. A main control means (main control device 162) that outputs payout command information (prize ball command) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (for example, a general winning opening 81) provided in the game area (game area PE).
In a gaming machine provided with a payout control means (payout control device 242) that controls a payout means (payout device 224) so that a game ball is paid out based on the input of the payout command information.
The main control means
A setting value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided with a plurality of stages (setting 1 to setting 3) of setting values corresponding to the expected acquisition value of the game ball, and one setting value is determined from the setting values. Function to execute change processing) and
The set value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means, and
When the set value is changed by the set value changing means, the first output means for outputting the set value information indicating the set value determined by the set value determining means to the payout control means, and the first output means.
It has a second output means for outputting set value information indicating a set value determined by the set value determining means to the payout control means in a preset cycle.
The payout control means
A set value information storage means for storing the set value information output by the first output means, and a set value information storage means.
An information determining means for determining whether or not the set value information output by the second output means matches the set value information stored in the set value information storage means.
When it is determined by the information determination means that the set value information output by the second output means does not match the set value information stored in the set value information storage means, the payout of the game ball is restricted. A gaming machine characterized by having a payout control means.

According to the feature B8, the set value determined by the main control means due to the setting change operation or the like is transmitted to the payout control means and stored in the set value information storage unit of the payout control means. After that, the set value information is periodically output from the main control means to the payout control means, and it is determined whether or not the set value stored at the time of changing the setting matches the newly acquired set value. If the set value information does not match, the payout of the game ball will be restricted. With such a configuration, the cooperation between the main control means and the payout control means can be strengthened, which can contribute to the improvement of the crime prevention function and the improvement of the reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature B9. If the set value information that should be output by the second output means has not been input even after the elapse of the cycle, the payout regulating means is at least until the set value information is received from the second output means. The gaming machine according to feature B8, which is characterized in that it is configured to regulate the payout of balls.

According to the feature B9, when the set value information is not input from the main control means even though the preset cycle has passed, the payout of the game ball is restricted until the set value information is received. It becomes. With such a configuration, the crime prevention function shown in feature B8 can be suitably enhanced.

Feature B10. With the first control means (main control device 162) that outputs the ball entry information (prize ball command) based on the ball entry into the ball entry unit (for example, the general prize opening 81) provided in the game area (game area PE). ,
A second control means (payout control device 242) that executes a predetermined control process based on the ball entry information output from the first control means, and
The first control means and the game situation monitoring means (monitoring device 600) for monitoring the game situation based on the information from the second control means are provided.
The first control means
A setting value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided with a plurality of stages (setting 1 to setting 3) of setting values corresponding to the expected acquisition value of the game ball, and one setting value is determined from the setting values. Function to execute change processing) and
It has a set value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means.
The first control means
A first output means for outputting specific information indicating a set value determined by the set value determining means to the second control means, and a first output means.
It has a second output means for outputting specific information indicating a set value determined by the set value determining means to the game status monitoring means.
The second control means
A specific information storage means for storing the specific information input from the first control means, and a specific information storage means.
It has a third output means for outputting the specific information stored in the specific information storage means to the game status monitoring means.
The gaming machine, wherein the gaming status monitoring means has a contrasting means for comparing the specific information input by the second output means with the specific information input by the third output means.

In a gaming machine having a setting change function, the set value may be changed illegally for the purpose of illegally acquiring benefits. At this time, if the information input to the monitoring device is falsified, there is a concern that the fact of fraud will be concealed and it will be difficult to detect it. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the specific information indicating the set value is not only directly input from the first control means to the game status monitoring means, but also to the game status monitoring means via the second control means. Entered. By comparing these specific information with the game status monitoring means, it is possible to detect whether or not the specific information has been tampered with. As a result, the defense function against the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be strengthened, and the crime prevention function of the gaming machine can be improved.

Feature B11. The first control means is configured to output game ball payout command information as the ball entry information.
The second control means is configured to control the payout means (payout device 224) so that the game ball is paid out based on the input of the payout command information.
When the first control means outputs the payout command information, the first control means outputs specific information to the second control means and the game status monitoring means.
The gaming machine according to feature B10, wherein the second control means outputs specific information to the gaming status monitoring means when paying out a gaming ball based on the payout command information.

When comparing specific information, if the timing is significantly deviated, there is a possibility that an erroneous judgment will occur when the setting is changed properly. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by inputting / outputting specific information according to the series of movements of ball entry → payout, the above timing deviation is suppressed and the accuracy of the judgment result is suitably improved. Can be made to.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature B group described in detail above.

<Characteristic C group>
The following feature C group is described as follows: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a pattern display device for variablely displaying a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. A lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a variable display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won. Regarding the background technology that a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1), "In recent years, the operation of the gaming machine Various measures have been taken to improve reliability. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to improve reliability. " Is.

Feature C1. A main control means (main control device 162) that outputs payout command information (prize ball command) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (for example, a general winning opening 81) provided in the game area (game area PE).
In a gaming machine provided with a payout control means (payout control device 242) that controls a payout means (payout device 224) so that a game ball is paid out based on the input of the payout command information.
The main control means
A setting value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided with a plurality of stages (setting 1 to setting 3) of setting values corresponding to the expected acquisition value of the game ball, and one setting value is determined from the setting values. Function to execute change processing) and
It has a set value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means.
It is equipped with monitoring means (notification / effect control device 140 and monitoring device 600) for monitoring the game status.
The monitoring means
A game information storage means (memory unit 604) that stores game information (number of winnings and winning probability), and
A determination means for determining whether or not the game information stored in the game information storage means corresponds to preset reference information (for example, a threshold value) (determination of step S1904 or the like by the notification / effect control device 140). Function to execute processing) and
A predetermined processing execution means (a function of executing the abnormality notification start processing in step S1908 by the notification / effect control device 140) that executes a predetermined processing (for example, a processing for abnormality notification) based on the determination result by the determination means. Have and
A gaming machine characterized in that the reference information is provided for each set value.

Due to the characteristics of a gaming machine having a setting change function, the behavior may differ depending on the set value. Therefore, in a configuration in which the game status is monitored and predetermined processing (for example, abnormality notification) is performed based on the monitoring result (judgment result), a judgment is made when any set value is to be uniquely judged. It becomes difficult to improve the certainty of the result. For example, when common reference information corresponding to all the set values is set, it is assumed that the range of the reference information becomes large and it becomes difficult to improve the certainty of the determination result. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the reference information is provided for each set value, the certainty of the judgment result can be improved and the reliability of the gaming machine (particularly the monitoring device) can be suitably improved. can.

It should be noted that the "abnormality notification start processing in step S1908 by the notification / effect control device 140" indicating "predetermined processing execution means (for example, processing for abnormality notification) that executes a predetermined processing (for example, processing for abnormality notification) based on the determination result by the determination means" shown in this feature. The notification control means (notification /) that controls the notification means (for example, the error display lamp unit 27 and the speaker unit 29) so that a predetermined notification is executed based on the determination result by the determination means. It is also possible to perform the function of executing the abnormality notification start processing in step S1908 on the effect control device 140) ”.

Feature C2. A main control means (main control device 162) that outputs payout command information (prize ball command) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (for example, a general winning opening 81) provided in the game area (game area PE).
In a gaming machine provided with a payout control means (payout control device 242) that controls a payout means (payout device 224) so that a game ball is paid out based on the input of the payout command information.
The main control means
A setting value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided with a plurality of stages (setting 1 to setting 3) of setting values corresponding to the expected acquisition value of the game ball, and one setting value is determined from the setting values. Function to execute change processing) and
It has a set value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means.
A monitoring means (notification / effect control device 140 and monitoring device 600) for monitoring the ball entry status into the ball entry unit is provided.
The monitoring means
A ball entry information storage means (memory unit 604) that stores ball entry information (number of winnings) corresponding to the number of balls entered into the ball entry unit, and
A step by a determination means (MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for determining whether or not the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means corresponds to preset reference information (for example, a threshold value). (Function to execute the determination process of S1904) and
A predetermined processing execution means (a function of executing the abnormality notification start processing in step S1908 by the notification / effect control device 140) that executes a predetermined processing (for example, a processing for abnormality notification) based on the determination result by the determination means. Have and
A gaming machine characterized in that the reference information is provided for each set value.

Due to the characteristics of a gaming machine having a setting changing function, the behavior of the gaming ball may differ depending on the set value, and the probability of entering the ball may differ depending on the set value. Therefore, in a configuration in which the game status is monitored and predetermined processing (for example, abnormality notification) is performed based on the monitoring result (judgment result), a judgment is made when any set value is to be uniquely judged. It becomes difficult to improve the certainty of the result. For example, when common reference information corresponding to all the set values is set, it is assumed that the range of the reference information becomes large and it becomes difficult to improve the certainty of the determination result. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the reference information is provided for each set value, the certainty of the judgment result can be improved and the reliability of the gaming machine (particularly the monitoring device) can be suitably improved. can.

It should be noted that the "abnormality notification start processing in step S1908 by the notification / effect control device 140" indicating "predetermined processing execution means (for example, processing for abnormality notification) that executes a predetermined processing (for example, processing for abnormality notification) based on the determination result by the determination means" shown in this feature. The notification control means (notification /) that controls the notification means (for example, the error display lamp unit 27 and the speaker unit 29) so that a predetermined notification is executed based on the determination result by the determination means. It is also possible to perform the function of executing the abnormality notification start processing in step S1908 on the effect control device 140) ”.

Feature C3. The monitoring means
A setting value specifying means (for example, a function of specifying the set value by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for specifying the set value determined by the set value determining means, and
A reference information switching means (a function of executing the threshold value setting process of step S1804 by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for switching the reference information to be referred to according to the set value specified by the set value specifying means. The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or the feature C2, which is characterized by having.

The determination process can be simplified by making the determination limited to the current set value instead of performing the determination on all the set values given to the gaming machine. This is a preferable configuration for reducing the control load associated with the addition of the monitoring function.

Feature C4. The game area is provided with a first ball entry unit (for example, a variable winning device 82) that can be switched between a receiving state in which the game ball can enter and a non-accepting state in which the game ball cannot enter. And
There is a difference in the frequency with which the first ball entry portion is switched to the acceptance state depending on the set value.
The gaming machine according to any one of feature C1 to feature C3, wherein the reference information is provided according to the frequency.

As shown in feature C4, when a variable ball entry section having a difference in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state depending on the set value is provided, the movement of the ball entry section causes the ball entry section to move. There is a difference in the frequency of ball entry and the frequency of entry into other ball entry areas. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by setting the reference information in consideration of the movement of the variable ball entry portion, the technical idea shown in the feature C1 and the like can be suitably embodied.

Feature C5. As the ball entry section, the first ball entry section and a second ball entry section (for example, a general winning opening 81d) different from the first ball entry section are provided.
The first ball entry section is arranged on a predetermined path (right route) through which the game ball flows down toward the second ball entry section.
The monitoring means has a storage unit that stores ball entry information (number of winnings) corresponding to the number of balls entered into the second ball entry unit.
The determination means has means for determining whether or not the ball entry information stored in the storage unit corresponds to the reference information.
The gaming machine according to feature C4, wherein the reference information is determined according to the frequency of entering the second ball, which differs for each set value.

As shown in feature C5, in a configuration in which a variable first ball entry section is arranged at an upstream position of the second ball entry section, the movement of the first ball entry section causes entry into the second ball entry section. Differences in ball frequency can occur. Therefore, in monitoring the ball entry status to the second ball entry section, as shown in this feature, by setting the reference information according to the ball entry frequency to the second ball entry section, the ball entry monitoring → determination It is possible to suitably improve the certainty of the above.

Feature C6. As the gaming state, a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the first ball entry portion is more likely to switch to the receiving state than the first gaming state are provided.
The reference information is a threshold value indicating the range of the ball entry frequency, and is
The lower limit of the threshold value is determined according to the frequency of ball entry into the second ball entry section in the first gaming state, and the upper limit of the threshold value is determined by the second ball entry section in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature C5, which is determined according to the frequency of entering a ball.

As shown in feature C6, a first gaming state in which the first ball-entry portion is relatively unlikely to be in the receiving state and a second gaming state in which the first ball-entry portion is relatively likely to be in the receiving state are provided. If so, the certainty of the determination result can be improved by setting the upper limit / lower limit of the threshold value according to the frequency of entering the second ball in each of these gaming states.

Feature C7. The set value includes a first set value and a second set value in which the first ball entry portion is more likely to switch to the receiving state than the first set value.
The reference information is information corresponding to the frequency of entering the ball into the first ball entry portion, and as the reference information, the first reference information corresponding to the first set value and the second reference information corresponding to the second set value. 2 standard information is provided,
Feature C5 or feature characterized in that the ball entry frequency to which the first reference information is associated is set to be higher than the ball entry frequency to which the second reference information is associated. The gaming machine described in C6.

As shown in feature C7, when there is a difference in the frequency of entering the first ball depending on the set value, the first reference information is set corresponding to the first set value where the frequency of entry is low, and then the ball is entered. By setting the second reference information corresponding to the second set value having a high ball frequency, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature B group to the feature C group described in detail above.

<Feature D group>
The following feature D group is described as follows: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a pattern display device for variablely displaying a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. A lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a variable display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won. Regarding the background technology that a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1), "In recent years, the operation of the gaming machine Various measures have been taken to improve reliability. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to improve reliability. " Is.

Feature D1. A main control means (main control device 162) that outputs payout command information (prize ball command) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (for example, a general winning opening 81) provided in the game area (game area PE).
In a gaming machine provided with a payout control means (payout control device 242) that controls a payout means (payout device 224) so that a game ball is paid out based on the input of the payout command information.
The main control means
Setting values corresponding to the expected acquisition value of the game ball are provided in a plurality of stages (settings 1 to 3), and one setting value is determined from the setting values. (Function to execute the setting change process of S1313) and
It has a set value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means.
The ball entry status monitoring means (notification / effect control device 140 and monitoring device 600) for monitoring the entry status into the ball entry unit is provided.
The ball entry status monitoring means
A ball entry information storage means (memory unit 604) that stores ball entry information (number of winnings) corresponding to the number of balls entered into the ball entry unit, and
Step S2006 in the determination means (MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for determining whether or not the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means corresponds to the preset reference information (threshold value). (Function to execute judgment processing, etc.) and
A function of executing a predetermined processing execution means (MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 to execute an abnormality notification start processing or the like in step S2010) that executes a predetermined processing (for example, a processing for abnormality notification) based on the determination result by the determination means. )When,
It has a set value storage means (a function of storing the set value in the notification / effect control device 140) for storing the set value determined by the set value determining means.
The ball entry information storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that the ball entry information is stored in a state of being associated with a set value stored in the set value storage means.

If the ball entry status is monitored by the ball entry status monitoring means, for example, when an event occurs in which the ball entry frequency greatly deviates from the design value due to deformation of a game nail or the like, it is detected at an early stage. be able to. This is preferable in order to suppress the disadvantages of the game hall and the player and improve the reliability of the game machine. Here, in a gaming machine having a setting changing function, the behavior of the gaming ball may differ depending on the set value, and the probability of entering the ball may differ. In the configuration shown in this feature, the ball entry information is stored in a state associated with the set value. In such a configuration, since the ball entry information can be sorted according to the set value, it is possible to improve the determination accuracy when determining whether or not the reference information is supported. Therefore, it is possible to increase the certainty of the monitoring result in the ball entry monitoring and contribute to the improvement of the reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature D2. The determination means has a selection means for selecting the ball entry information associated with the set value stored in the set value storage means from the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the determination is made based on the selected ball entry information.

It is important to handle temporary variations in ball entry in order to monitor the ball entry status. For example, if the bias of entering a ball temporarily increases, it is difficult to identify whether it is due to an accidental factor, but past information should be used to calculate the average, etc. Therefore, the variation can be reduced. That is, it is preferable to secure a certain amount of data to be referred to when making a determination. However, as shown in feature D1, the stored data includes data having different corresponding setting values, and therefore, when they are collectively referred to, the certainty of the data is lowered. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the ball entry information corresponding to the same set value as the current set value is selected from the ball entry information stored in the past and used for the determination, the feature D1 is obtained. The shown effect can be suitably exhibited.

Feature D3. The ball entry information storage means stores the number of game balls that have entered the ball entry portion as the ball entry information when a predetermined number of game balls are supplied to the game area.
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, which comprises means for restricting the storage of ball entry information when the set value is changed before reaching the predetermined number.

In a gaming machine having a setting change function, the timing at which the setting change is performed varies. Therefore, it cannot be denied that the setting may be changed in the process of accumulating information (timing before reaching a predetermined number). In the configuration in which the entry information is stored in association with the set value, even if the data is stored incompletely, the usefulness of the data is low and the storage capacity is compressed. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the setting is changed in the middle, it is possible to realize a practically preferable configuration by restricting the storage of the entry information.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the ball entry information storage means defines an upper limit number of ball entry information that can be stored for each set value.

Even in a gaming machine having a setting change function, the setting is not always changed frequently, and the same setting value may be maintained for a certain period of time. In such a case, if the stored ball entry information is biased due to the set value, there is a concern that the effect shown in the feature D1 or the like cannot be exerted well. For example, if the information in setting 1 is excessively small even though settings 1 to 3 are provided as setting values, when the determination in setting 1 is executed under the situation. It is assumed that the data that can be referred to will be insufficient and the certainty of the judgment result will decrease. In this respect, if the upper limit is specified for the ball entry information that can be stored for each set value as shown in this feature, it is possible to preferably suppress the decrease in the accuracy of the determination due to the lack of data.

Feature D5. The ball entry information storage means has a plurality of storage areas that can store the ball entry information, and when the number of stored ball entry information reaches the upper limit, a new storage area is added to any of the storage areas. It is configured to overwrite the acquired ball entry information.
Feature D1 characterized by having a means for determining a storage area to be overwritten according to the number of each set value associated with each ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D3.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, for example, when the ball entry information is insufficient at a certain set value and the ball entry information is excessive at another set value, the ball entry information is excessively overwritten. It can be assumed that As a result, it is possible to prevent a large bias in the number of stored ball entry information for each set value.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the reference information is provided for each set value.

Due to the characteristics of a gaming machine having a setting change function, the behavior may differ depending on the set value. For this reason, in a configuration in which the game status is monitored and predetermined processing (for example, processing for anomaly notification) is performed based on the monitoring result (judgment result), when any set value is to be uniquely determined. In addition, it becomes difficult to improve the certainty of the judgment result. When the reference information is set so as to correspond to all the set values, it is assumed that the range of the reference information becomes large and it becomes difficult to improve the certainty. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the reference information is provided for each set value, the certainty of the judgment result can be improved and the reliability of the gaming machine (particularly the monitoring device) can be suitably improved. can.

Feature D7. When the set value corresponding to the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means is different from the current set value, the determination means currently uses the corrected value for the stored ball entry information. It has an information conversion means for converting into information corresponding to the set value of, and a means for making the determination based on the ball entry information corresponding to the current set value and the ball entry information converted by the information conversion means. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2.

In a gaming machine having a setting changing function, the selection of the setting value varies, and the setting value at the time of making the above determination and the setting value of the ball entry information stored in the past do not always match. Here, according to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the stored sample is associated with a setting value different from the current setting value, it is converted according to the current setting value by the correction. Therefore, it is possible to secure winning information that can be used as a judgment sample regardless of the difference in the set value. This can contribute to improving the certainty of the determination result.

Feature D8. In the game area, as the ball entry unit, a first ball entry unit (for example, a variable winning device 82) that can be switched between a receiving state in which the game ball can enter and a non-accepting state in which the game ball cannot enter, and the first ball-entry unit. A second ball entry section (for example, a general winning opening 81d) different from the first entry section is provided.
The first ball entry section is arranged on a predetermined path (right route) through which the game ball flows down toward the second ball entry section.
The ball entry information storage means has a storage unit that stores ball entry information (winning number) corresponding to the number of balls entered into the second ball entry unit.
The determination means has means for determining whether or not the ball entry information stored in the storage unit corresponds to the reference information.
The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the correction value is determined according to the frequency of entering the second ball, which is different for each set value.

As shown in feature D8, in a configuration in which a variable first ball entry section is arranged at an upstream position of the second ball entry section, the movement of the first ball entry section causes entry into the second ball entry section. Differences in ball frequency can occur. Therefore, in monitoring the state of entry into the second entry section, as shown in this feature, a correction value is determined according to the frequency of entry into the second entry section, and the stored entry is stored. It is possible to preferably improve the conversion accuracy when converting the sphere information into the information corresponding to the current set value by using the correction value.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features A to C to the feature D group described in detail above.

<Feature E group>
The following feature group E is described as follows: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a pattern display device that variablely displays a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. A lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a variable display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won. Regarding the background technology that a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1), "In recent years, the operation of the gaming machine Various measures have been taken to improve reliability. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to improve reliability. " Is.

Feature E1. Starting ball entry portions (operating ports 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE), and
Information acquisition means (function of acquiring hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit, and
An acquisition information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A lottery means (main control device 162) that draws a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a function to execute a hit / fail judgment process, etc. on the MPU 402 of the above.
A setting value determining means for determining one setting value from among the setting values having a plurality of stages corresponding to the expected acquisition value of the game ball (a function of executing the setting change process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162). When,
The set value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means, and
A monitoring information storage means (first storage area 605 in the storage unit 604 of the monitoring device 600) for storing monitoring information related to the game, and
Judgment means (MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for determining the presence or absence of an abnormality that is a specific event based on the monitoring information stored by the monitoring information storage means and the predetermined determination reference information (threshold value). (Function to execute judgment processing) and
When it is determined by the determination means that an abnormality has occurred, a notification means (a function of executing an abnormality notification start process by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) that performs a predetermined notification (for example, an abnormality notification) and
A release means (a function of executing an abnormality notification end process in the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for releasing the predetermined notification by the notification means based on the release operation, and
A gaming machine characterized by having a release number storage means (second storage area 606 in the storage unit 604 of the monitoring device 600) that stores the release number of the predetermined notification by the release means.

According to the feature E1, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring information, a predetermined notification is executed in response to the occurrence of the abnormality. As a result, it is possible to promptly take measures against the abnormality and prevent the player, the game hall, etc. from suffering a disadvantage. Here, if the cause of the abnormality has not been resolved, the predetermined notification will be repeated. When consideration is given to the replacement of players, hall managers, etc., it becomes difficult to identify how many abnormalities are repeated. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, the predetermined notification is released based on the release operation, and the number of times the release operation is executed is stored. Therefore, it is possible to grasp after the fact how much the release operation is performed. As a result, for example, repeated abnormalities (for example, improper handling of abnormalities) can be suppressed from being overlooked, which can contribute to improvement in the reliability of the gaming machine.

Even if the fraudster intentionally cancels the abnormality notification to conceal the fraud, the number of cancellations is stored. As a result, it can be estimated from the stored number of cancellations that there is a possibility that the fraud was intentionally concealed. Incidentally, for example, in a configuration that stores the number of occurrences of an abnormality or the number of notifications, it is possible to identify the fact of the occurrence of an abnormality, but it is difficult to identify whether it is due to an accidental factor or an artificial factor. Become. In view of such circumstances, there is a clear technical significance in memorizing the number of cancellations.

Feature E2. A state specifying means for specifying the state of the gaming machine when the release operation is performed, and
A state determining means for determining whether or not the state of the gaming machine specified by the state specifying means is a predetermined state is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the release number storage means has at least a means for storing the release number when the release operation is performed in the predetermined state.

If the state of the gaming machine is taken into consideration when storing the number of times of release, it is possible to improve the estimation accuracy of whether or not the release operation is fraudulent. For example, if the release operation is performed in a situation where the release operation is normally difficult or impossible, it can be found that the release operation is likely to be illegal. ..

Feature E3. A setting value specifying means for specifying a set value before the release operation is performed and a set value after the release operation is performed is provided.
The game according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein the release number storage means has means for storing the release number when the set value is changed at least before and after the release operation. Machine.

For example, assuming a configuration in which the criteria for determining an abnormality differ depending on the set value, it cannot be denied that such a difference may be used to cheat the occurrence of an abnormality. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the number of times of release is stored when the set value is changed due to the release operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the release operation suspected of being fraudulent from being confused with other release operations. This is a preferable configuration for improving the crime prevention function of the gaming machine.

Feature E4. A reference information switching means for switching the determination reference information referred to by the determination means based on a predetermined release which is the release operation is provided.
Any one of the feature E1 to the feature E3, wherein the release number storage means has a means for storing the release number when the determination reference information is changed in accordance with the predetermined release operation. The gaming machine described in one.

In a configuration in which the determination criterion information is changed by a predetermined release operation, there is a possibility that the predetermined release operation is executed in order to suppress the conspicuous fraud due to the notification accompanying the occurrence of the abnormality. Therefore, if the number of such release operations is memorized, it is possible to prevent the release operation suspected of being fraudulent from being confused with other release operations. This is a preferable configuration for improving the crime prevention function of the gaming machine.

Feature E5. A reference information switching means (a function of executing the threshold value setting process in step S1804 by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for switching the determination reference information according to the set value determined by the set value determining means. Prepare,
The frequency of entering the ball differs depending on the set value.
The monitoring information storage means has a configuration in which ball entry information indicating the number of balls entering the ball entry portion provided in the game area is stored as the monitoring information.
Described in any one of the feature E1 to the feature E3, wherein the release number storage means has a means for storing the release number when the set value is changed in accordance with a predetermined release operation. Gaming machine.

In a configuration in which the frequency of entering the ball into the ball entry portion differs depending on the set value, the certainty of the determination result can be improved by switching the determination reference information for each set value. However, in such a configuration, even though it is a situation where it should be determined that an abnormality has actually occurred, an act of cheating the fact is performed by abusing the judgment standard information switching function. The possibility cannot be denied. Therefore, when the technical idea shown in the feature E1 or the like is applied to the configuration shown in the present feature and the set value (judgment standard information) is switched in accordance with the cancellation of the notification, it is preferably overlooked. Can be suppressed.

Feature E6. It has a first set value and a second set value as the set values.
As the judgment reference information, the first judgment reference information that defines the judgment reference range corresponding to the first set value and the reference range defined by the first judgment reference information are set to be deviated from each other. It has the second judgment reference information that defines the judgment reference range corresponding to the second set value.
In the release number storage means, an abnormality occurs due to the determination means when the ball entry information deviates from the first determination reference information to the second determination reference information side under the situation where the first set value is set. When the judgment reference information is switched from the first judgment reference information to the second judgment reference information in accordance with the cancellation of the predetermined notification based on the predetermined cancellation operation under the situation where it is determined that the judgment has been made. , The gaming machine according to feature E4 or feature E5, which is configured to store the number of times of release.

When the notification is made with the first set value, even if the release operation is simply performed, the abnormality determination → notification is immediately executed by restarting the game. If it is assumed that a fraudster who takes such circumstances into consideration tries to avoid the abnormality notification by changing the set value together in order to shift the judgment reference range to the side where it is difficult to be judged as abnormal. It is not preferable that the release operation is mixed with other release operations. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, by memorizing the number of release times in such a case, it is possible to suppress the oversight of the release operation that is likely to be fraudulent, and further improve the crime prevention function. Can contribute to.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature D group to the feature E group described in detail above.

<Characteristic F group>
The following feature F group is described as follows: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a pattern display device for variablely displaying a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. A lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a variable display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won. Regarding the background technology that a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1), "In recent years, the operation of the gaming machine Various measures have been taken to improve reliability. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to improve reliability. " Is.

Features F1. Starting ball entry portions (operating ports 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE), and
Information acquisition means (function of acquiring hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit, and
An acquisition information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A lottery means (main control device 162) that draws a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a function to execute a hit / fail judgment process, etc. on the MPU 402 of the above.
A setting value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided with a plurality of stages (setting 1 to setting 3) of setting values corresponding to the expected acquisition value of the game ball, and one setting value is determined from the setting values. Function to execute change processing) and
The set value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means, and
A monitoring information storage means (storage unit 604 of the monitoring device 600) for storing monitoring information related to the game, and
Judgment means (MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for determining the presence or absence of an abnormality that is a specific event based on the monitoring information stored by the monitoring information storage means and the predetermined determination reference information (threshold value). (Function to execute judgment processing) and
When it is determined by the determination means that an abnormality has occurred, a notification means (a function of executing an abnormality notification start process by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) that performs a predetermined notification (for example, an abnormality notification) and
A release means (a function of executing an abnormality notification release process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for releasing the predetermined notification by the notification means based on a predetermined release operation, and
Initial setting means (main control device 162) for setting a predetermined set value as an initial set value when the set value is changed by the set value changing means when the predetermined notification is canceled by the release means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with (a function of executing a setting change process on the MPU 402).

If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring result of the monitoring information, that fact is notified. As a result, for example, the manager of the game hall can be urged to take measures against the abnormality. It is preferable that the release operation can be performed without eliminating the cause of the abnormality in order to improve the convenience in the game hall. However, in such a configuration, the player or the game hall may suffer an unexpected disadvantage because the game is played again with the notification canceled without eliminating the cause of the abnormality. This is not preferable because it causes a decrease in reliability of the gaming machine. The set values are managed in the game hall and are directly linked to profits, so it is easy for the hall manager to pay close attention. Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the release operation is performed, the initial set value at the time of setting change is forcibly set to a predetermined set value. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the hall manager that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cause of the abnormality from being left as it is and to contribute to the improvement of the reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature F2. Starting ball entry portions (operating ports 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE), and
Information acquisition means (function of acquiring hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit, and
An acquisition information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A lottery means (main control device 162) that draws a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a function to execute a hit / fail judgment process, etc. on the MPU 402 of the above.
A setting value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided with a plurality of stages (setting 1 to setting 3) of setting values corresponding to the expected acquisition value of the game ball, and one setting value is determined from the setting values. Function to execute change processing) and
The set value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means, and
A monitoring information storage means (storage unit 604 of the monitoring device 600) for storing monitoring information related to the game, and
Judgment means (MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for determining the presence or absence of an abnormality that is a specific event based on the monitoring information stored by the monitoring information storage means and the predetermined determination reference information (threshold value). (Function to execute judgment processing) and
When it is determined by the determination means that an abnormality has occurred, a notification means (a function of executing an abnormality notification start process by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) that performs a predetermined notification (for example, an abnormality notification) and
A release means (a function of executing an abnormality notification release process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for releasing the predetermined notification by the notification means based on a predetermined release operation, and
It is provided with an initial setting means (a function of executing a setting change process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for setting an initial setting value when the set value is changed by the set value changing means.
When the predetermined release operation is not performed, the initial setting means sets the set value before the change operation is performed as the initial set value as the initial set value, and the predetermined release operation is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a means for setting a predetermined set value as the initial set value when it is in a good condition.

If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring result of the monitoring information, that fact is notified. As a result, for example, the manager of the game hall can be urged to take measures against the abnormality. It is preferable that the release operation can be performed without eliminating the cause of the abnormality in order to improve the convenience in the game hall. However, in such a configuration, the player or the game hall may suffer an unexpected disadvantage because the game is played again with the notification canceled without eliminating the cause of the abnormality. This is not preferable because it causes a decrease in reliability of the gaming machine. The set value is directly linked to profit and is managed in the game hall. Therefore, it is easy for the hall manager to pay close attention. Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the setting value before the change operation is inherited as the initial setting value when the release operation is not performed, while the initial setting at the time of setting change is performed when the release operation is performed. The value is forcibly set to a predetermined set value. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the hall manager that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cause of the abnormality from being left as it is and to contribute to the improvement of the reliability of the gaming machine.

Feature F3. As the set value, it has a first set value and a second set value in which the expected acquisition value is larger than the first set value.
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the initial setting means is configured to set the second set value as the predetermined set value.

If the predetermined set value when the forced change is made is a set value that is frequently used in the game hall, there is a concern that confusion may easily occur in identifying whether or not the forced change has occurred. .. Here, in the game hall, the chance that the set value that is advantageous to the player is used is less than the chance that the set value that is disadvantageous to the player is used. In the configuration shown in this feature, in consideration of such circumstances, a relatively advantageous second set value is set as a predetermined set value. Thereby, the above-mentioned confusion can be suppressed.

Feature F4. As the set value, it has a first set value that is advantageous to the game hall and a second set value that is advantageous to the player.
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the initial setting means is configured to set the second set value as the predetermined set value.

If the predetermined set value when the forced change is made is a set value that is frequently used in the game hall, there is a concern that confusion may easily occur in identifying whether or not the forced change has occurred. .. Here, in the game hall, the chance that the set value that is advantageous to the player is used is less than the chance that the set value that is disadvantageous to the player is used. In the configuration shown in this feature, in consideration of such circumstances, a second set value that is advantageous to the player is set as a predetermined set value. Thereby, the above-mentioned confusion can be suppressed.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the initial setting means is configured to set a setting having the largest expected acquisition value among a plurality of set values as the predetermined set value. ..

If the predetermined set value when the forced change is made is a set value that is frequently used in the game hall, there is a concern that confusion may easily occur in identifying whether or not the forced change has occurred. .. Here, in the game hall, the chance that the set value that is advantageous to the player is used is less than the chance that the set value that is disadvantageous to the player is used. In the configuration shown in this feature, in consideration of such circumstances, the second set value that is most advantageous for the player is set as a predetermined set value. Thereby, the above-mentioned confusion can be suppressed.

Feature F6. A reference information switching means (a function of executing the threshold value setting process in step S1804 by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for switching the determination reference information according to the set value determined by the set value determining means. Prepare,
The frequency of entering the ball differs depending on the set value.
A feature F1 to a feature F5, wherein the monitoring information storage means stores the ball entry information indicating the number of balls entering the ball entry portion provided in the game area as the monitoring information. The gaming machine described in any one.

In a gaming machine of a type in which a gaming ball flows down a gaming area, the gaming nails may be deformed or the like by coming into contact with a gaming nail or the like arranged in the gaming area during cleaning or maintenance. When the flow path of the game ball changes due to such deformation, the ball enters at a frequency higher than the original design value, or the ball enters at a frequency lower than the original design value. This causes a disadvantage for the game hall and the player. Therefore, it is possible to identify that the above-mentioned inconvenience (abnormality) has occurred by configuring the monitoring information storage means to store the entry information. However, it does not always occur at a constant frequency, and if the monitoring period is short, there will be some variation. On the other hand, when the monitoring period is set long, the variation can be suppressed, but it takes time to identify that the above-mentioned inconvenience has occurred. Under such circumstances, the configuration in which the notification based on the result of the abnormality determination can be arbitrarily canceled has an advantage that the accuracy of the determination result and the improvement of the responsiveness can be considered. However, in such a configuration, since it is difficult to visually identify the abnormality itself, there is a possibility that the fact will be forgotten after a certain amount of time has passed since the notification was released. By applying the technical idea shown in the feature F1 to such a configuration, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

Feature F7. It has a first set value and a second set value as the set values.
As the judgment reference information, the first judgment reference information that defines the judgment reference range corresponding to the first set value and the reference range defined by the first judgment reference information are set to be deviated from each other. It has the second judgment reference information that defines the judgment reference range corresponding to the second set value.
The predetermined release operation is a setting change operation by the set value changing means.
In the initial setting means, an abnormality has occurred in the determination means because the ball entry information deviates from the first determination reference information to the second determination reference information side under the situation where the first set value is set. When the judgment reference information is switched from the first judgment reference information to the second judgment reference information in accordance with the cancellation of the predetermined notification based on the predetermined cancellation operation under the situation where it is determined to be. The gaming machine according to feature F6, which is configured to set the predetermined set value as the initial set value.

When the notification is made with the first set value, the abnormality determination → notification is immediately executed even if the release operation is simply performed. If a fraudster who considers such circumstances tries to avoid the abnormality notification by changing the set value together to shift the judgment reference range to the side where it is difficult to be judged as abnormal, it is determined as the initial setting value. The set value of is set. As a result, it is possible to suppress oversight of the release operation, which is highly likely to be fraudulent, and contribute to further improvement of the crime prevention function.

Feature F8. The set value determining means has a start-up determining means for determining the set value based on the power-on of the gaming machine.
The start-up determination means determines the set value before the power is cut off as a new set value when the predetermined release operation is not performed, and when the predetermined release operation is performed, the setting value is determined. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F7, which comprises means for determining the predetermined set value as a new set value.

The setting change is not always performed every day, and the set value once determined may be maintained for a certain number of days. When such a situation is taken into consideration, as shown in this feature, the set value can be taken over / forced to be changed by determining the set value at the time of turning on the power, so that such a situation can be appropriately dealt with.

Feature F9. Starting ball entry portions (operating ports 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE), and
Information acquisition means (function of acquiring hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit, and
An acquisition information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A lottery means (main control device 162) that draws a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a function to execute a hit / fail judgment process, etc. on the MPU 402 of the above.
A setting value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided with a plurality of stages (setting 1 to setting 3) of setting values corresponding to the expected acquisition value of the game ball, and one setting value is determined from the setting values. Function to execute change processing) and
The set value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means, and
A monitoring information storage means (storage unit 604 of the monitoring device 600) for storing monitoring information related to the game, and
A determination means (a function of executing determination processing by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for determining the presence or absence of an abnormality that is a specific event based on the monitoring information stored by the monitoring information storage means.
When it is determined by the determination means that an abnormality has occurred, a notification means (a function of executing an abnormality notification start process by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) that performs a predetermined notification (for example, an abnormality notification) and
A release means (a function of executing an abnormality notification release process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for releasing the predetermined notification by the notification means based on a predetermined release operation, and
It is provided with an initial setting means (a function of executing a setting change process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for setting an initial setting value when the set value is changed by the set value changing means.
When the predetermined release operation is not performed, the initial setting means sets the set value before the change operation is performed as the initial set value as the initial set value, and the predetermined release operation is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a means for setting a setting value different from the setting value before the change operation is performed as the initial setting value as the initial setting value.

If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring result of the monitoring information, that fact is notified. As a result, for example, the manager of the game hall can be urged to take measures against the abnormality. It is preferable that the release operation can be performed without eliminating the cause of the abnormality in order to improve the convenience in the game hall. However, in such a configuration, the player or the game hall may suffer an unexpected disadvantage because the game is played again with the notification canceled without eliminating the cause of the abnormality. This is not preferable because it causes a decrease in reliability of the gaming machine. The set value is directly linked to profit and is managed in the game hall. Therefore, it is easy for the hall manager to pay close attention. Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the setting value before the change operation is inherited as the initial setting value when the release operation is not performed, while the initial setting at the time of setting change is performed when the release operation is performed. The value is forcibly set to a predetermined set value. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the hall manager that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cause of the abnormality from being left as it is and to contribute to the improvement of the reliability of the gaming machine.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature E group to the feature F group described in detail above.

<Characteristic G group>
The following feature G group is described as follows: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a pattern display device for variablely displaying a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. A lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a variable display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won. Regarding the background technology that "a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1)." Various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to the game. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine in order to increase the degree of attention to the game. " It was done with a task.

Features G1. Starting ball entry portions (operating ports 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE), and
Information acquisition means (function of acquiring hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit, and
An acquisition information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A lottery means (main control device) that draws a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (for example, open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Function to execute the hit / fail judgment process etc. with MPU 402 of 162) and
A symbol display device (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and capable of displaying a plurality of symbols (symbol strings Z1 to Z3) on the display screen.
Display control means (notification / effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying the pattern so as to be a combination of patterns corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means after the pattern is displayed in a variable manner.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the special gaming state, the gaming state in which the game state is shifted to the special gaming state after the pattern is stopped and displayed by the display control means. Transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
A setting value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided with a plurality of stages (setting 1 to setting 3) of setting values corresponding to the expected acquisition value of the game ball, and one setting value is determined from the setting values. Function to execute change processing) and
It is provided with a set value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means.
The display control means
When the winning result is obtained by the lottery by the lottery means, after starting the variable display of the pattern, the final stop pattern among the patterns in which the first pattern combination corresponding to the winning result may be established. In the situation where the other symbols other than the above are stopped and displayed, the first symbol combination is stopped and displayed via the reach variable display which displays the final stopped symbol in a variable manner, thereby notifying the transition to the special gaming state. The first notification means (a function of executing a hit reach with the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) and
When the lottery by the lottery results in a non-winning result that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state, after starting the variable display of the pattern, the second reach corresponding to the non-winning result is displayed. It has a second notification means (a function of executing a detached reach with the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) to notify that the special gaming state is not entered by stopping and displaying the pattern combination.
When the notification is executed by the second notification means, a suggestion means (a function of executing the setting suggestion by the notification / effect control device 140) that suggests the set value determined by the set value determination means is provided. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped.

In a gaming machine having a setting changing function, the degree of advantage changes depending on the set value, so it is one of the pleasures to play the game while guessing the set value. Here, when the reach variation display is executed, the player's attention to the game tends to be high. By configuring the setting value to be suggested (setting suggestion) when the player's attention is high, the chance that the setting suggestion is overlooked can be reduced.

Further, when the reach variation display is executed, the winning result may be notified via the reach variation display, so that the degree of attention to the effect is increased. However, if the fact that the result is a non-winning result is notified from the state in which the attention level is high in this way, the attention level to the game may be significantly reduced as the expectation is lowered. In this respect, as shown in this feature, by setting the setting suggestion in addition to the reach variation display, it is possible to suppress a large decrease in the degree of attention at the time of non-winning result.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the suggestion means makes the suggestion on the display screen of the pattern display device.

In the configuration in which the lottery result is clearly indicated by the combination of patterns that are stopped and displayed on the display screen as shown in the feature G2, the player's attention is drawn to the game area (specifically, the game area flows down when the reach variation display is executed. It is easy to move from the game ball) to the display screen. Therefore, if the above-mentioned setting suggestion is executed on the display screen, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the setting suggestion is overlooked even though the setting suggestion is performed. Thereby, the effect shown in the feature G1 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature G3. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2, wherein the suggestion means makes the suggestion after the reach variation display is displayed.

In the configuration in which the winning result is notified via the reach variation display, the attention to the variation display of the pattern is increased by shifting to the reach variation display. In this way, if the setting suggestion is made in a situation where the degree of attention is high, the above-mentioned chance of overlooking can be suitably reduced.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to any one of feature G1 to feature G3, wherein the suggestion means makes the suggestion in association with a stop display of a pattern combination corresponding to a lottery result.

In a configuration in which the lottery result is clearly indicated by a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display screen, the degree of attention may drop at once because it becomes clear that the result is a non-winning result. Therefore, by configuring the configuration so that the setting suggestion can be generated at such a timing, such a decrease in the degree of attention can be suitably suppressed.

Feature G5. The display control means stops and displays the pattern combination corresponding to the lottery result, and then displays a definite display (final stop display) that keeps the pattern combination stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (confirmed display period). It is configured to execute
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G1 to the feature G4, wherein the suggestion means makes the suggestion during the predetermined period.

In a configuration in which the lottery result is clearly indicated by a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display screen, the degree of attention may drop at once because it becomes clear that the result is a non-winning result. Therefore, by configuring the configuration so that the setting suggestion can be generated at such a timing, such a decrease in the degree of attention can be suitably suppressed.

Feature G6. The suggestion means has one of the feature G1 to the feature G5, which has a continuation means for continuing the suggestion started in the previous game round so as to straddle the next game round. Described gaming machine.

It is feared that the above-mentioned setting suggestion is more likely to be overlooked as the execution period becomes shorter. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, since the setting suggestion started in the previous game round can be continued so as to straddle the next game round, the chance of such an oversight can be reduced. For example, assuming a configuration in which the game times progress one after another, it is preferable in order to improve the operating rate of the game machine. However, the fact that the player cannot stop the game at an arbitrary timing may be a factor of overlooking the setting suggestion. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature G7. The acquired information storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
The lottery means is configured to sequentially perform the lottery for special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The continuation means is configured to continue the suggestion so as to straddle the next game when special information corresponding to the next game is stored by the end of the previous game. The gaming machine according to the feature G6, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the feature G7, since the period for suggesting the setting is extended due to the accumulation of special information, it is possible to promote the launch of the game ball and contribute to the improvement of the operating rate of the game machine.

Feature G8. The acquired information storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
The lottery means is configured to sequentially perform the lottery for special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The suggestion means has the execution period determining means for determining the execution period of the suggestion based on the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The gaming machine described in any one.

According to the feature G8, it is assumed that the player who wants to confirm the setting suggestion plays the game with the expectation that the setting suggestion will be performed for as long as possible. Here, if the execution period of the setting suggestion is determined by the number of special information stored, the number of special information stored so that the setting suggestion lasts for a long time becomes a number that is advantageous to itself as much as possible. The game will be played aiming at this, which can contribute to the suppression of the monotony of the game.

Feature G9. When the second notification means stops and displays the symbol combination corresponding to the non-winning result through the reach variation display, the suggestion means sets the symbol combination to the symbol combination corresponding to the suggestion. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G1 to the feature G8, which has a means for suggesting a set value.

If the setting suggestion is executed by using the pattern combination for the non-winning result as shown in the feature G9, the setting suggestion information may be included when the non-winning result is specified. It is assumed that the player pays attention to the pattern combination. According to this configuration, the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention can be suitably exhibited.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is described as "The suggestion means performs the non-winning of the pattern combination when the pattern combination corresponding to the non-winning result is stopped and displayed through the reach variation display by the second notification means. As a result, the gaming machine according to any one of the feature G1 to the feature G8, which is characterized by having a means for forming a pattern combination corresponding to the above suggestion. "

Feature G10. The acquired information storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
The lottery means is configured to sequentially perform the lottery for special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The display control means stops and displays the pattern combination corresponding to the lottery result, and then displays a definite display (final stop display) that keeps the pattern combination stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (confirmed display period). It is configured to execute
When the second notification means stops and displays the symbol combination corresponding to the non-winning result through the reach variation display, the suggestion means sets the symbol combination to the symbol combination corresponding to the suggestion. It has a means to suggest the set value,
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G1 to the feature G5, wherein the suggestion means ends the suggestion based on the elapse of the predetermined period.

In the case where the setting suggestion is made by the combination of the symbols displayed at the stop, there is a possibility that the player who dislikes overlooking the setting suggestion makes an irregular hit such that the game round progresses once. This is expected to hinder the smooth progress of the game and the improvement of the operating rate of the game machine. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, the setting suggestion ends when the confirmation period elapses. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the game being delayed unobtrusively due to fear of oversight.

Feature G11. As the normal game state, the first normal game state (normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode) and the first normal game state are set so that the frequency of ball entry into the starting ball entry portion is higher than that of the first normal game state. The second normal game state (normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode) is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G1 to the feature G10, wherein the suggestion means is configured to give the suggestion in the first normal gaming state.

In the configuration shown in the feature G11, the game proceeds smoothly in the second normal game state as compared with the first normal game state. In the situation where the game is progressing rapidly in the second normal game state, it is assumed that the player's attention will be immediately directed to the next game in the case of a non-winning result. Even if the setting is suggested in such a situation, there is a concern that the chances of it being overlooked will increase. In view of such circumstances, it is said that the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed by configuring the setting suggestion in the first normal game state in which the game progresses relatively slowly as shown in this feature. It has technical significance.

Feature G12. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a first winning result (for example, a normal jackpot result) and a second winning result (for example, a probabilistic jackpot result) which is more advantageous to the player than the first winning result are provided.
The display control means stops and displays the pattern combination corresponding to the first winning result when it is the first winning result, and displays the pattern combination corresponding to the second winning result when it is the second winning result. It has a means to display the stop,
The suggestion means has a means for executing the suggestion when a reach variation display in which a pattern combination corresponding to the second winning result may be established is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G11.

The higher the player's expectations, the greater the disappointment when notified that the result is a non-winning result. This is not preferable because it causes a decrease in motivation to play. In view of such circumstances, as shown in this feature, it is a non-winning result that the setting suggestion is executed in the reach variation display in which the pattern combination corresponding to the second winning result may be established. It is preferable to alleviate the decrease in motivation to play in the case of.

Feature G13. As the reach fluctuation display, a first reach fluctuation display and a second reach fluctuation display having a higher expectation of winning result than the first reach fluctuation display are provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G1 to the feature G12, wherein the suggestion means has a means for making the suggestion in the second reach variation display.

The higher the expected reach variation display, which is the winning result, the greater the disappointment when the notification that the result is non-winning is given (so-called intense heat removal). This is not preferable because it causes a decrease in motivation to play. In view of these circumstances, as shown in this feature, the configuration in which the setting suggestion is executed in the second reach fluctuation display is to alleviate the decrease in the motivation to play in the case of a non-winning result. preferable.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature F group to the feature G group described in detail above.

<Characteristic H group>
The following feature H group is described as follows: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a pattern display device for variablely displaying a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. A lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a variable display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won. Regarding the background technology that "a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1)." Various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to the game. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine in order to increase the degree of attention to the game. " It was done with a task.

Features H1. Starting ball entry portions (operating ports 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE), and
Information acquisition means (function of acquiring hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit, and
An acquisition information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A lottery means (main control device 162) that draws a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Function to execute pass / fail judgment processing etc. with MPU402)
A pattern display device (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and capable of displaying a plurality of patterns on the display screen, and
Display control means (notification / effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying the pattern so as to be a combination of patterns corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means after the pattern is displayed in a variable manner.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the special gaming state, the gaming state in which the game state is shifted to the special gaming state after the pattern is stopped and displayed by the display control means. Transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
A setting value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided with a plurality of stages (setting 1 to setting 3) of setting values corresponding to the expected acquisition value of the game ball, and one setting value is determined from the setting values. Function to execute change processing) and
It is provided with a set value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means.
The display control means
When the winning result is obtained by the lottery by the lottery means, after starting the variable display of the pattern, the final stop pattern among the patterns in which the first pattern combination corresponding to the winning result may be established. In the situation where the other symbols other than the above are stopped and displayed, the first symbol combination is stopped and displayed through the reach variable display which displays the final stopped symbol in a variable manner, thereby indicating that the special gaming state is entered. 1 The first notification means for executing notification and
When the lottery by the lottery results in a non-winning result that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state, after starting the variable display of the pattern, the second reach corresponding to the non-winning result is displayed. It has a second notification means for executing a second notification indicating that the special gaming state is not entered by stopping and displaying the pattern combination.
A suggestion means (a function of executing the setting suggestion by the notification / effect control device 140) for suggesting the set value determined by the set value determining means is provided.
The suggestion means
An execution number storage means (a function of storing the number of times the reach is executed by the notification / effect control device 140) for storing the number of executions of the second notification being executed by the second notification means, and
The possibility-determining means (a function of executing the setting suggestion possibility determination process by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for determining whether or not the suggestion can be executed based on the number of executions stored by the execution number storage means. A gaming machine characterized by having.

In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, the execution of the reach variation display raises expectations for a special gaming state. However, even if the reach variation display is executed, it does not necessarily shift to the special gaming state, and may not shift to the special gaming state. The continuation of such an event becomes a factor that lowers the player's willingness to play. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not the suggestion of the set value (setting suggestion) is executed based on the number of times the non-winning result is notified via the reach variation display (the number of times the second notification is executed). Is determined. Therefore, even if the reach variation display is unexploded, it is possible to give the player the impression that the setting suggestion is approaching, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for playing. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature H2. A lottery number storage means for storing the number of times the lottery has been executed by the lottery means is provided.
When the number of lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined number, the pass / fail determination means may determine that the suggestion is executed as compared with the case where the number of lottery is less than the predetermined number. The gaming machine according to feature H1, characterized in that it is configured to be high.

According to the feature H2, when the reach variation display is deviated, the larger the number, the easier it is for the setting suggestion to be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play even when the normal gaming state continues.

Feature H3. The gaming machine according to feature H2, wherein the pass / fail determination means is configured so that the predetermined number of times decreases as the number of times of lottery increases.

Reach variation display → In a configuration in which the expectation of setting suggestion increases due to the non-winning result, the player's motivation to play may decrease as the game progresses without executing the reach variation display. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the number of times the lottery → non-winning result is increased, the threshold of setting suggestion becomes lower, the decrease in the motivation to play when the reach fluctuation display does not occur can be alleviated.

Feature H4. The suggestion means has an erasing means for erasing the information stored in the execution number storage means when the first notification is executed by the first notification means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature H4, the number of executions is reset when the first notification is executed (that is, the winning result is obtained). As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of frequent setting suggestions.

Feature H5. The predetermined number of times is provided for each set value.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H2 to the feature H4, wherein a difference is provided so that the higher the expected acquisition value of the game ball is, the larger the predetermined number of times is.

The fact that the setting suggestion is not executed forever can be a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a difference is provided so that the set value that is advantageous to the player increases the predetermined number of times that is the reference for setting suggestion, it is advantageous to the player when the setting suggestion does not occur. Expectations for the set value can be raised, and it can contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Feature H6. As the reach fluctuation display, a first reach fluctuation display and a second reach fluctuation display which is more likely to be the first notification than the first reach fluctuation display are provided.
Any of the features H1 to H5, wherein the execution number storage means is configured to store the number of times the second notification corresponding to the second reach variation display is executed by the second notification means. The gaming machine described in one.

According to the feature H6, it is possible to suitably alleviate the feeling of loss when the reach variation display with a high degree of expectation is deviated.

Feature H7. A first state in which the probability that the decision to execute the suggestion is made by the pass / fail determination means is relatively low, and a second state in which the probability that the decision to execute the suggestion is made are relatively high are provided. Has been
A lottery number storage means for storing the number of times the lottery has been executed by the lottery means, and
Described in any one of the features H1 to H6, which comprises a switching means for switching between the first state and the second state based on the number of lottery stored by the lottery number storage means. Gaming machine.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, there are sections in which setting suggestions are likely to occur and sections in which setting suggestions are unlikely to occur depending on the number of lottery. As a result, it is possible to enhance the sharpness when the game is performed in anticipation of setting suggestions.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature G group to the feature H group described in detail above.

<Feature I group>
The following feature group I is described as follows: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a pattern display device that displays a variable pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. A lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a variable display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won. Regarding the background technology that a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1), "In recent years, the security of gaming machines. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine in order to improve the crime prevention property. ”The invention was made with the problem to be solved. ..

Feature I1. The main control device (main control device 162) that executes the main control related to the game, and
A pattern display device (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and capable of variablely displaying a pattern on the display screen, and a pattern display device (design display device 253).
A display control device (notification / effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for displaying and controlling the pattern display device under the control of the main control device is provided.
The main controller
Information acquisition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry portions (operating ports 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE). Function to get hold information) and
An acquisition information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A migration determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process or the like in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the migration information.
Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result that corresponds to the transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. ) (A function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation is performed with the end of the game rotation operation as one of the game times when the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means is obtained after the game rotation operation is started. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 87) and
An execution period setting means (a function of determining the variation display time by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the determination result of the transition determination means, and
It has a transmission means (a function of outputting a fluctuation start command by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transmitting execution period information corresponding to the execution period set by the execution period setting means to the display control device.
The display control device is a variation display period setting means (in the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) that sets a variation display period of the pattern in the pattern display device based on the execution period information received from the main control device. Has a function to set the variable display time)
A setting value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided with a plurality of stages (setting 1 to setting 3) of setting values corresponding to the expected acquisition value of the game ball, and one setting value is determined from the setting values. Function to execute variable processing) and
It is provided with a set value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means.
As the execution period, a common execution period common to each set value and a unique execution period unique to each set value are provided.
The display control device is provided with a suggestion means (a function of executing the setting suggestion by the notification / effect control device 140) that suggests the set value when the execution period information indicating the specific execution period is received. A game machine featuring.

According to the feature I1, the execution period information transmitted from the main control device with the start of the game round operation includes information indicating a set value. According to this configuration, the main control device can instruct whether or not to suggest the set value (setting suggestion), and the display control device having a lower defense function than the main control device is illegally operated. It is possible to prevent the setting suggestion from being executed illegally.

Further, since the execution period information transmitted from the main control device serves as the base for suggesting the setting, it is not necessary for the display control device to store and retain the information indicating the set value. It is advantageous to have a configuration in which it is not necessary to store the set value in the display control device having a low defense function in order to suppress the leakage of the information indicating the set value.

Furthermore, since the execution period information periodically transmitted from the main controller also serves as the information indicating the set value, the information indicating the set value is targeted in comparison with the configuration in which the information indicating the set value is separately transmitted. It is possible to make it difficult to obtain information illegally.

Feature I2. The suggestion means is characterized in that, when the specific execution period is set as the execution period, the suggestion is executed in the game times executed in the specific execution period. The gaming machine described in I1.

According to the feature I2, when the execution period information indicating the peculiar execution period is received from the main control device, the suggestion is executed in the game times executed in the peculiar execution period. In such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally read the set value from the display control device as compared with the configuration in which the suggestion is carried over to the later game times.

Feature I3. When the display control device receives the execution period information indicating the specific execution period, the information indicating the execution period information and the current set value based on the execution period information by the end of the corresponding game round. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2, characterized in that it has a means for erasing.

According to the feature I3, when the execution period information indicating the unique execution period is received from the main control device, the execution period information and the information indicating the specified current set value are deleted by the next game. It will be. That is, the information indicating the set value is not carried over to other game times. By limiting the handling period of the information indicating the set value in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally read the set value from the display control device.

Feature I4. The common execution period and the specific execution period each have a corresponding one corresponding to a predetermined variable display executed by the pattern display device.
The period corresponding to the predetermined variation display in the specific execution period is set to be longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined variation display in the common execution period. The gaming machine according to any one of the features I3.

According to the feature I4, since the variation display related to the common execution period and the variation display related to the specific execution period are common, it is difficult to specify the set value from the difference in the appearance and the like of the variation display.

Further, especially in the combination with the feature I3, since the difference is provided so that the specific execution period is longer, the execution period of the setting suggestion is set in the configuration in which the setting suggestion is executed only for the corresponding game times. It will be easier to earn.

Feature I5. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, wherein the display control device has a regulatory means for restricting suggestions by the suggestive means when a predetermined regulatory condition is satisfied. ..

According to the feature I5, the suggestion can be regulated by the judgment of the display control device side, for example, depending on the game situation. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive suggestion.

Feature I6. The common execution period and the specific execution period each have a corresponding one corresponding to a predetermined variable display executed by the pattern display device.
The period corresponding to the predetermined variation display in the common execution period is configured to be a period recognized by the player as being the same as the period corresponding to the predetermined variation display in the specific execution period. The gaming machine according to feature I5, which is characterized in that it is used.

In the configuration where the suggestion can be avoided even when the specific execution period is received as shown in the feature I5, the set value can be estimated from a slight difference in the period when the predetermined variation display is executed. Not preferred. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the common execution period and the specific execution period are configured so as to be recognized as the same, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature I7. Feature I5, characterized in that the beginning portion of the variation display corresponding to the common execution period and the beginning portion of the variation display corresponding to the specific execution period are configured so that the outline of the variation display is common. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to feature I6.

In the configuration with the feature I5 or the like, it is possible to specify the presence or absence of the setting suggestion by counting the variable display time in the pattern display device. However, as shown in this feature, if the beginning of the variable display is made common, it is possible to make it difficult to count the execution period aiming at the game times in which the setting suggestion may occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the presence or absence of the setting suggestion from being specified even when the display control device is configured to partially restrict the setting suggestion.

Feature I8. As the common execution period, a first execution period and a second execution period longer than the first execution period are provided.
The characteristic I5 to the feature is that the specific execution period is configured to be a period that is recognized by the player as being the same as the case where the variation display corresponding to the second execution period is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of I7.

When the first execution period and the second execution period exist in the common execution period, the difference between the common execution period and the unique execution period is set by setting the specific execution period based on the relatively long second execution period. Can be difficult to identify visually or the like.

Feature I9. The acquired information storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
The migration determination means is configured to sequentially perform a migration determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the migration information.
The display control device has means for notifying the determination result by stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the determination result by the transition determination means, and maintaining the symbol combination until the start of the next game round.
The suggestion means executes the suggestion by assuming that the pattern combination to be stopped and displayed corresponds to the unique execution period when the execution period information indicating the specific execution period is received.
Even when the regulation means receives execution period information indicating the specific execution period from the main control device, if subsequent special information is not stored, the above suggestion that the predetermined regulation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature I5 to the feature I8, which is configured to regulate the above.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the unique execution period is specified, if the subsequent special information is not stored, the pattern combination corresponding to the setting suggestion is excluded from the target of the stop display. .. As a result, it is possible to urge the player who expects the setting suggestion to refrain from the act of unnecessarily delaying the game (for example, irregular striking), which can contribute to the improvement of the operating rate of the gaming machine. Further, for example, by avoiding that the pattern combination corresponding to the setting suggestion is left in a stopped display, it is possible to suppress excessive dependence on the setting suggestion and contribute to the soundness of the game.

Feature I10. A reach fluctuation display is provided as one of the fluctuation displays.
The specific execution period is a period corresponding to the reach variation display.
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I9, wherein the suggestion means has means for executing the suggestion on the display screen.

When the reach variation display is executed, the expectation of the transition to the special gaming state is increased, so that the player's attention is likely to be directed to the reach variation display. By executing the suggestion in a situation where the player's attention is high, the chance that the suggestion is overlooked can be reduced.

Feature I11. The acquired information storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
The migration determination means is configured to sequentially perform a migration determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the migration information.
Any of feature I1 to feature I10, which is configured so that the unique execution period is more likely to be set by increasing the number of reserved information stored in the acquired information storage means. The gaming machine described in one.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, it is assumed that a player who plays a game in anticipation of setting suggestion plays a game so that the number of stored special information is as large as possible. This can contribute to the improvement of the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Further, as shown in feature I1, in a configuration in which the execution period includes information on setting suggestion, it is possible to identify the setting suggestion by counting the execution period. In this case, if the game times progress continuously, it becomes difficult to count, so there is a concern that a delay act may be performed so that the game times do not progress continuously. This hinders the improvement of the operating rate of the gaming machine. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the delay action is avoided by increasing the probability that the unique execution period is set when the number of reserved information is large (that is, when the game rounds progress continuously). It can be promoted and the decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

Feature I12. The main control device (main control device 162) that executes the main control related to the game, and
A pattern display device (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and capable of variablely displaying a pattern on the display screen, and a pattern display device (design display device 253).
A display control device (notification / effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for displaying and controlling the pattern display device under the control of the main control device is provided.
The main controller
Information acquisition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry portions (operating ports 83a, 83b) provided in the game area (game area PE). Function to get hold information) and
An acquisition information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A migration determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process or the like in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the migration information.
Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result that corresponds to the transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. ) (A function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation is performed with the end of the game rotation operation as one of the game times when the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means is obtained after the game rotation operation is started. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 87) and
An execution period setting means (a function of determining the variation display time by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining the execution period of the game rotation operation based on the determination result of the transition determination means, and
It has a transmission means (a function of outputting a fluctuation start command by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transmitting execution period information corresponding to the execution period set by the execution period setting means to the display control device.
The display control device is a variation display period setting means (in the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) that sets a variation display period of the pattern in the pattern display device based on the execution period information received from the main control device. Has a function to set the variable display time)
A setting value determining means (set by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is provided with a plurality of stages (setting 1 to setting 3) of setting values corresponding to the expected acquisition value of the game ball, and one setting value is determined from the setting values. Function to execute variable processing) and
It is provided with a set value changing means (setting change switch 166 attached to the main control device 162) operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means.
The set value includes a first set value and a second set value whose expected acquisition value is smaller than the first set value.
As the execution period, a common execution period common to each set value and a unique execution period unique to each set value are provided.
When the first set value is set as the set value, the first execution period is set as the execution period, and when the second set value is set as the set value, the second set value is set as the execution period. Means for setting one execution period or second execution period,
The display control device includes a suggestion means (a function of executing the setting suggestion by the notification / effect control device 140) that suggests the set value when the execution period information indicating the second execution period is received. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature I12, the execution period information transmitted from the main control device with the start of the game round operation includes information indicating a set value. According to this configuration, the main control device can instruct whether or not to suggest the set value (setting suggestion), and the display control device having a lower defense function than the main control device is illegally operated. It is possible to prevent the setting suggestion from being executed illegally.

Further, since the execution period information transmitted from the main control device serves as the base for suggesting the setting, it is not necessary for the display control device to store and retain the information indicating the set value. It is advantageous to have a configuration in which it is not necessary to store the set value in the display control device having a low defense function in order to suppress the leakage of the information indicating the set value.

Furthermore, since the execution period information periodically transmitted from the main controller also serves as the information indicating the set value, the information indicating the set value is targeted in comparison with the configuration in which the information indicating the set value is separately transmitted. It is possible to make it difficult to obtain information illegally.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature H group to the feature I group described in detail above.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player (game ball launching handle 41), a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (game ball launching mechanism 110), and the launching thereof. A ball passage (guidance passage 103) that guides a game ball to a predetermined game area and each game part (game nail 38, etc.) arranged in the game area (game area PE) are provided, and among these game parts, a predetermined one is provided. A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a passing portion (general winning opening 81, etc.).

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol changes start due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol sequence in the final stop. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that is provided with a ball tray to generate a game, etc. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... Pachinko machine as a game machine, 14 ... Front door frame, 29 ... Speaker unit, 80 ... Game board unit, 80a ... Game area forming body, 81 ... General winning opening, 82 ... Variable winning device, 83a ... Upper operating port , 83b ... Lower actuating port, 91 ... Electric accessory, 140 ... Notification / effect control device, 162 ... Main control device, 253 ... Design display device, 391a to 391f ... Detection sensor, 401 ... MPU, 403 ... ROM, 404 ... RAM, 410 ... display control device, 442 ... MPU, 500 ... game information display device, 600 ... monitoring device, 602 ... MPU, 603 ... information acquisition unit, 604 ... storage unit, PE ... game area.

Claims (7)

A main control means that outputs payout command information based on the entry of a ball into the entry section provided in the game area, and
In a gaming machine provided with a payout control means for controlling the payout means so that the game ball is paid out based on the input of the payout command information.
The main control means
A setting value determining means for determining one setting value from among the setting values having multiple stages corresponding to the expected acquisition value of the game ball, and
It has a set value changing means operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means.
A gaming machine characterized in that the payout command information output from the main control means includes specific information indicating a set value determined by the set value determining means. The main control means has means for outputting set value information indicating a set value determined by the set value determining means to the payout control means when the set value is changed by the set value changing means. ,
The payout control means
A set value information storage means for storing the set value information input with the change of the set value, and a setting value information storage means.
Whether or not the payout command information is normal when the payout command information is input is based on the specific information included in the payout command information and the set value information stored in the set value information storage means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a determination information determining means. When the determination result by the information determination means is normal, the payout control means pays out the game ball based on the payout command information, and the determination result by the information determination means is not normal. The gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising means for regulating the payout of the gaming ball based on the payout command information in the case of the determination result. When the payout command information is input in a situation where the set value information is not stored in the set value information storage means, the payout control means pays out the game ball based on the payout command information. The gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the gaming machine has a means for regulating. The game according to any one of claims 2 to 4, wherein the main control means is configured to prioritize the output of the set value information over the output of the payout command information. Machine. The payout control means
When the information determination means determines that the payout command information is normal, the first storage means for storing the information on the number of payouts of the game balls corresponding to the payout command information as the payout number information.
A payout drive control means that drives and controls the payout means in order to pay out the number of game media corresponding to the payout number information stored in the first storage means.
Have,
When it is determined by the information determination means that it is not normal, the game balls are paid out for those stored in the first storage means up to that point, and the payout command information subject to the determination is paid out. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 5, wherein the payout is regulated. The payout control means
When the information determination means determines that the payout command information is normal, the first storage means for storing the information on the number of payouts of the game balls corresponding to the payout command information as the payout number information.
A payout drive control means that drives and controls the payout means in order to pay out the number of game media corresponding to the payout number information stored in the first storage means.
When the payout command information is determined to be abnormal by the information determination means, a second storage means for storing information on the number of game balls to be paid out corresponding to the payout command information, and
In a situation where the information on the number of payouts of the game balls is stored in the second storage means, when the information determination means determines that the payout command information is normal, the second storage means stores the information. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 5, further comprising an information transfer means for transferring the stored payout number information to the first storage means.

Images